Remote Automation Solutions Bristol TeleRTU RTU 3530-15B Owner's Manual
Reklama
Reklama
Instruction Manual
CI-3530-15B
May, 2006
TeleRTU Model 3530-15B
TeleRTU
™
Remote Terminal Unit
www.EmersonProcess.com/Bristol
IMPORTANT! READ INSTRUCTIONS BEFORE STARTING!
Be sure that these instructions are carefully read and understood before any operation is attempted. Improper use of this device in some applications may result in damage or injury. The user is urged to keep this book filed in a convenient location for future reference.
These instructions may not cover all details or variations in equipment or cover every possible situation to be met in connection with installation, operation or maintenance.
Should problems arise that are not covered sufficiently in the text, the purchaser is advised to contact Bristol for further information.
EQUIPMENT APPLICATION WARNING
The customer should note that a failure of this instrument or system, for whatever reason, may leave an operating process without protection. Depending upon the application, this could result in possible damage to property or injury to persons. It is suggested that the purchaser review the need for additional backup equipment or provide alternate means of protection such as alarm devices, output limiting, fail-safe valves, relief valves, emergency shutoffs, emergency switches, etc. If additional in-formation is required, the purchaser is advised to contact Bristol .
RETURNED EQUIPMENT WARNING
When returning any equipment to Bristol for repairs or evaluation, please note the following: The party sending such materials is responsible to ensure that the materials returned to Bristol are clean to safe levels, as such levels are defined and/or determined by applicable federal, state and/or local law regulations or codes. Such party agrees to indemnify Bristol and save Bristol harmless from any liability or damage which Bristol may incur or suffer due to such party's failure to so act.
ELECTRICAL GROUNDING
Metal enclosures and exposed metal parts of electrical instruments must be grounded in accordance with OSHA rules and regulations pertaining to "Design Safety Standards for Electrical Systems," 29 CFR, Part 1910, Subpart S, dated: April 16, 1981 (OSHA rulings are in agreement with the National Electrical Code).
The grounding requirement is also applicable to mechanical or pneumatic instruments that include electrically-operated devices such as lights, switches, relays, alarms, or chart drives.
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE FROM ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE VOLTAGE
This product contains sensitive electronic components that can be damaged by exposure to an electrostatic discharge (ESD) voltage. Depending on the magnitude and duration of the ESD, this can result in erratic operation or complete failure of the equipment. Read supplemental document S14006 at the back of this manual for proper care and handling of ESD-sensitive components.
Bristol Inc.
1100 Buckingham Street, Watertown, CT 06795
Telephone (860) 945-2200
C.
D.
F.
A.
A.
B.
E.
B.
WARRANTY
Bristol warrants that goods described herein and manufactured by Bristol are free from defects in material and workmanship for one year from the date of shipment unless otherwise agreed to by Bristol in writing.
Bristol warrants that goods repaired by it pursuant to the warranty are free from defects in material and workmanship for a period to the end of the original warranty or ninety
(90) days from the date of delivery of repaired goods, whichever is longer.
Warranties on goods sold by, but not manufactured by Bristol, are expressly limited to the terms of the warranties given by the manufacturer of such goods.
All warranties are terminated in the event that the goods or systems or any part thereof are (i) misused, abused or otherwise damaged, (ii) repaired, altered or modified without
Bristol's consent, (iii) not installed, maintained and operated in strict compliance with instructions furnished by Bristol, or (iv) worn, injured or damaged from abnormal or abusive use in service time.
THESE WARRANTIES ARE EXPRESSLY IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED (INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION WARRANTIES AS TO
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE), AND NO
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, NOR ANY REPRESENTATIONS, PROMISES,
OR STATEMENTS HAVE BEEN MADE BY BRISTOL UNLESS ENDORSED HEREIN
IN WRITING. FURTHER, THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES WHICH EXTEND BEYOND
THE DESCRIPTION OF THE FACE HEREOF.
No agent of Bristol is authorized to assume any liability for it or to make any written or oral warranties beyond those set forth herein.
REMEDIES
Buyer's sole remedy for breach of any warranty is limited exclusively to repair or replacement without cost to Buyer of any goods or parts found by Seller to be defective if
Buyer notifies Bristol in writing of the alleged defect within ten (10) days of discovery of the alleged defect and within the warranty period stated above, and if the Buyer returns such goods to Bristol's Watertown office, unless Bristol's Water-town office designates a different location, transportation prepaid, within thirty (30) days of the sending of such notification and which upon examination by Bristol proves to be defective in material and workmanship. Bristol is not responsible for any costs of removal, dismantling or reinstalllation of allegedly defective or defective goods. If a Buyer does not wish to ship the product back to Bristol, the Buyer can arrange to have a Bristol service person come to the site. The Service person's transportation time and expenses will be for the account of the Buyer. However, labor for warranty work during normal working hours is not chargeable.
Under no circumstances will Bristol be liable for incidental or consequential damages resulting from breach of any agreement relating to items included in this quotation, from use of the information herein or from the purchase or use by Buyer, its employees or other parties of goods sold under said agreement.
How to return material for Repair or Exchange
Before a product can be returned to Bristol for repair, upgrade, exchange, or to verify proper operation, form (GBU 13.01) must be completed in order to obtain a RA (Return
Authorization) number and thus ensure an optimal lead time. Completing the form is very important since the information permits the Bristol Repair Dept. to effectively and efficiently process the repair order.
You can easily obtain a RA number by:
A. FAX
Completing the form (GBU 13.01) and faxing it to (860) 945-3875. A Bristol Repair
Dept. representative will return call (or other requested method) with a RA number.
B. E-MAIL
Accessing the form (GBU 13.01) via the Bristol Web site (www.bristolbabcock.com) and sending it via E-Mail to [email protected]
. A Bristol Repair Dept. representative will return E-Mail (or other requested method) with a RA number.
C. Mail
Mail the form (GBU 13.01) to
Bristol Inc.
Repair
1100 Buckingham Street
Watertown, CT 06795
A Bristol Repair Dept. representative will return call (or other requested method) with a RA number.
D. Phone
Calling the Bristol Repair Department at (860) 945-2442. A Bristol Repair Department representative will record a RA number on the form and complete Part I, then send the form to the Customer via fax (or other requested method) for Customer completion of Parts II & III.
A copy of the completed Repair Authorization Form with issued RA number should be included with the product being returned. This will allow us to quickly track, repair, and return your product to you.
Bristol Inc. Repair Authorization Form
(off-line completion)
(Providing this information will permit Bristol Inc. to effectively and efficiently process your return. Completion is required to receive optimal lead time. Lack of information may result in increased lead times.)
Date___________________ RA #___________________SH_
Standard Repair Practice is as follows: Variations to this is practice may be requested in the “Special Requests” section.
•
Evaluate / Test / Verify Discrepancy
•
Repair / Replace / etc. in accordance with this form
•
Return to Customer
Line No.____________
Please be aware of the Non warranty standard charge:
•
There is a $100 minimum evaluation charge, which is applied to the repair if applicable (
√
in “returned”
B,C, or D of part III below)
Part I Please complete the following information for single unit or multiple unit returns
Address No.
Bill to :
Purchase Order:
Phone:
(office use only) Address No.
Ship to:
Fax:
(office use only)
Contact Name: ____________________________________
E-Mail:
Model No./Part No. Description
Range/Calibration S/N
Reason for return : Failure Upgrade Verify Operation Other
1.
Describe the conditions of the failure (Frequency/Intermittent, Physical Damage, Environmental Conditions,
Communication, CPU watchdog, etc.)
(Attach a separate sheet if necessary)
2. Comm. interface used: Standalone RS-485 Ethernet Modem (PLM (2W or 4W) or SNW) Other: ______________
3. What is the Firmware revision? _____________________ What is the Software &version?
Part III If checking “replaced” for any question below, check an alternate option if replacement is not available
A.
If product is within the warranty time period but is excluded due to Bristol’s warranty clause, would you like the product: repaired returned replaced scrapped?
B.
If product were found to exceed the warranty period, would you like the product:
C.
If product is deemed not repairable would you like your product: repaired returned replaced scrapped? returned replaced scrapped?
D.
If Bristol is unable to verify the discrepancy, would you like the product: returned replaced *see below?
* Continue investigating by contacting the customer to learn more about the problem experienced? The person to contact that has the most knowledge of the problem is: ______________________________ phone_____________________
If we are unable to contact this person the backup person is: _________________________ phone_____________________
Special Requests: ____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
Ship prepaid to: Bristol Inc., Repair Dept., 1100 Buckingham Street, Watertown, CT 06795
Phone: 860-945-2442 Fax: 860-945-3875 Form GBU 13.01 Rev. B 04/11/06
Bristol
Training
GET THE MOST FROM YOUR BRISTOL
INSTRUMENT OR SYSTEM
• Avoid Delays and problems in getting your system on-line
• Minimize installation, start-up and maintenance costs.
• Make the most effective use of our hardware and software.
• Know your system.
As you know, a well-trained staff is essential to your operation. Bristol Inc. offers a full schedule of classes conducted by full-time, professional instructors. Classes are offered throughout the year at three locations: Houston, Orlando and our Watertown, CT headquarters. By participating in our training, your personnel can learn how to install, calibrate, configure, program and maintain any and all Bristol products and realize the full potential of your system.
For information or to enroll in any class, contact our training department in Watertown at
(860) 945-2343. For Houston classes, you can also contact our Houston office, at (713) 685-
6200.
A Few Words About Bristol Inc.
For over 100 years, Bristol has been providing innovative solutions for the measurement and control industry. Our product lines range from simple analog chart recorders, to sophisticated digital remote process controllers and flow computers, all the way to turnkey
SCADA systems. Over the years, we have become a leading supplier to the electronic gas measurement, water purification, and wastewater treatment industries.
On off-shore oil platforms, on natural gas pipelines, and maybe even at your local water company, there are Bristol Inc. instruments, controllers, and systems running year-in and year-out to provide accurate and timely data to our customers.
Getting Additional Information
In addition to the information contained in this manual, you may receive additional assistance in using this product from the following sources:
Help Files / Release Notes
Many Bristol Inc. software products incorporate help screens. In addition, the software typically includes a ‘read me’ release notes file detailing new features in the product, as well as other information which was available too late for inclusion in the manual.
Contacting Bristol Inc. Directly
Bristol Inc.'s world headquarters are located at 1100 Buckingham Street, Watertown,
Connecticut 06795, U.S.A.
Our main phone numbers are:
(860) 945-2200
(860) 945-2213 (FAX)
Regular office hours are Monday through Friday, 8:00AM to 4:30PM Eastern Time, excluding holidays and scheduled factory shutdowns. During other hours, callers may leave messages using Bristol's voice mail system.
Telephone Support - Technical Questions
During regular business hours, Bristol Inc.'s Application Support Group can provide telephone support for your technical questions.
For technical questions about TeleFlow products call (860) 945-8604.
For technical questions about Control Wave call (860) 945-2394 or (860) 945-2286.
For technical questions regarding Bristol’s OpenEnterprise product, call (860) 945-3865 or e-mail: [email protected]
For technical questions regarding ACCOL products, OpenBSI Utilities , UOI and all other software except for Control Wave and OpenEnterprise products, call (860) 945-2286.
For technical questions about Network 3000 hardware, call (860) 945-2502.
You can e-mail the Application Support Group at: [email protected]
The Application Support Group maintains an area on our web site for software updates and technical information. Go to: www.bristolbabcock.com/services/techsupport/
For assistance in interfacing Bristol hardware to radios, contact Bristol’s Communication
Technology Group in Orlando, FL at (407) 629-9463 or (407) 629-9464 .
You can e-mail the Communication Technology Group at: [email protected]
Telephone Support - Non-Technical Questions, Product Orders, etc.
Questions of a non-technical nature (product orders, literature requests, price and delivery information, etc.) should be directed to the nearest sales office (listed on the rear cover of this manual) or to your Bristol-authorized sales representative.
Please call the main Bristol Inc. number (860-945-2200) if you are unsure which office covers your particular area.
Visit our Site on the World Wide Web
For general information about Bristol Inc. and its products, please visit our site on the
World Wide Web at: www.bristolbabcock.com
Training Courses
Bristol’s Training Department offers a wide variety of courses in Bristol hardware and software at our Watertown, Connecticut headquarters, and at selected Bristol regional offices, throughout the year. Contact our Training Department at (860) 945-2343 for course information, enrollment, pricing, and scheduling.
Contents
Page
1.2.2 TeleRTU CPU Board ................................................................................................ 1-3
1.2.3 Internal Mounting Brackets ....................................................................................... 1-5
1.2.4 Display/Switch Panel Assembly ................................................................................ 1-5
1.2.5 Serial Communications Ports ................................................................................... 1-5
1.2.5.1 BSAP Message Support ........................................................................................... 1-6
1.3 .................................................................................................................. 1-6
1.3.1 Solar Panel Option .................................................................................................... 1-7
1.3.3
1.3.4
1.3.5
Expansion Transmitter Interface Board (ETIB) Option .............................................. 1-7
Expansion Communications Port RS-232 Board Option ........................................... 1-8
Expansion RS-485 and/or Analog Output Board Option ........................................... 1-8
1.5 MODEL NUMBER ANALYSIS ................................................................................ 1-10
Section 1A - APPLICATION SOFTWARE
1A.1 CATEGORIES OF APPLICATION SOFTWARE ....................................................1A-1
1A.2 ACCOL TOOLS SOFTWARE .................................................................................1A-2
1A.4 OPEN BSI UTILITIES SOFTWARE .......................................................................1A-4
1A.5.2 Local Area network (LAN) .......................................................................................1A-7
1A.5.3 Wide Area Network (WAN) .....................................................................................1A-9
Section 2 - INSTALLATION & OPERATION
2.1 INSTALLATION IN HAZARDOUS AREAS ............................................................... 2-1
2.2 TeleRTU INSTALLATION SITE CONSIDERATIONS .............................................. 2-1
2.2.3 Opening The Instrument Front Cover ....................................................................... 2-1
2.2.4 CPU Board Configuration ......................................................................................... 2-2
2.2.4.1 JP3 Battery Backup Enable ...................................................................................... 2-2
2.2.4.2 JP4
2.2.4.3 JP5 Manual Reset .................................................................................................... 2-3
2.3.1
2.3.2
Overview of TeleRTU Configuration .......................................................................... 2-3
Mounting the Model 3530-15B TeleRTU Unit............................................................ 2-5
2.3.2.1 Notes .............................................................................................................. 2-5
2.3.2.4 Signal Shielding and Grounding ............................................................................... 2-6
CI-3530-15B Contents / 0-1
Contents
Page
Section 2 - INSTALLATION & OPERATION (Continued)
2.3.2.5 ................................................................................................... 2-7
2.3.3.1 RS-232 Network and Local Communications Ports................................................... 2-8
2.3.3.4 Modem or Radio On Network Port........................................................................... 2-10
2.3.4 Wiring Input/Output Signals .................................................................................... 2-11
2.3.5 Mounting the Optional Solar Panel ........................................................................ 2-15
2.3.5.1 Swivel (Directional Facing) ..................................................................................... 2-15
2.4.1 Changing the Local Address for a New TeleRTU.................................................... 2-16
2.4.2 Downloading the Application Load .......................................................................... 2-20
2.4.3 Upgrading TeleRTU Firmware................................................................................. 2-22
2.5 APPLICATION SOFTWARE REFERENCE DOCUMENTS .................................... 2-25
2.6 INSTALLATION & CONFIGURATION OF OPTIONS ............................................. 2-26
3.2 ACCESSING PARTS FOR TESTING OR REPLACEMENT .................................... 3-1
3.3 COMPONENT REMOVAL & REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES .............................. 3-2
3.3.1 Lead Acid Battery Removal/Replacement Procedure .............................................. 3-2
3.3.2 CPU Circuit Board Removal/Replacement ............................................................... 3-3
3.3.3 Removal/Replacement of the On Board Fuse F1 ..................................................... 3-5
3.3.4 Removal/Replacement of the On Board Battery ....................................................... 3-5
3.3.5 Removal/Replacement of the Display/Switch Panel Assembly ................................ 3-6
3.3.6 Removal/Replacement of Modem or Radio Options ................................................ 3-8
3.3.7 Removal/Replacement of the Expansion TIB Option ............................................... 3-8
3.3.8 Removal/Replacement of the Expansion RS-232 Intf. Bd. Option ............................ 3-8
3.3.9 Removal/Replacement of the EXP. RS-485 and/or AO Bd. Option .......................... 3-8
3.4 TROUBLESHOOTING TIPS ..................................................................................... 3-8
3.4.1 Battery & Fuse F1 Checks (Processor not running or no power) ............................ 3-8
3.4.3 LCD Display Checks ................................................................................................. 3-9
3.4.4 Field Wiring/Signal Checks ..................................................................................... 3-10
4.2 CPU, MEMORY & PROGRAM INTERFACE ........................................................... 4-1
0-2 / Contents CI-3530-15B
Contents
Section 4 - SPECIFICATIONS (Continued )
Page
4.10 ................................................................................................. 4-4
Supplements
Reserved .............................................................................................................. Appendix B
Reserved ...............................................................................................................Appendix C
Reserved ...............................................................................................................Appendix D
Reserved ...............................................................................................................Appendix E
Reserved ............................................................................................................... Appendix F
Reserved .............................................................................................................. Appendix G
Radio Installation Guide for MDSModel 4710A/B, 9710A/B & 9810 Radios ..........Appendix H
FreeWave Radio Option For Instruction Manual CI-3530-15B................................ Appendix I
Expansion Comm. Port RS-232 Board for Models 3530-XXX .........................PIP-EXP232TF
Expansion RS-485 and/or Analog Output Board for 3530-XXX ......................PIP-EXP485AO
Expansion Transmitter Interface Board for Models 3530-XXX......................... PIP-EXPTIBTF
TeleFlow Site Considerations For Equipment Installation, Grounding & Wiring ......... S1400A
Care and Handling of PC Boards and ESD-Sensitive Components ...........................S14006
REFERENCED or ASSOCIATED BRISTOL DOCUMENTS
Bristol 9600 bps -PSTN Modem Instruction Manual ................................................... CI-9600
Bristol 9600 bps -PSTN Modem P/N 400000-01-6 Instruction Manual .................. CI-9600TF
Isolated RS-485 Interface Board ...................................................................... PIP-ISORS485
CI-3530-15B Contents / 0-3
Contents
Page
REFERENCED OEM MANUALS
MDS 4710A – Remote Data Transceiver (Radio)
MDS 4710/9710 Series 400MHz/900 MHz Remote Data Transceiver Installation and Operation Guide –
MDS Doc. 05-3305A01, Rev. B, Sept. 2000 (PDF = 3305B-710AC.pdf) for model MDS 4710A
MDS 4710B – Data Transceiver (Radio)
MDS 4710B/9710B Data Transceiver Installation and Operation Guide – MDS Doc. 05-3316A01, Rev. E,
Sept. 2000 (PDF = 3316E-x710B.pdf) for model MDS 4710B
MDS 9810 – Spread Spectrum Data Transceiver (Radio)
MDS 9810/24810 900 MHz/2.4GHz Spread Spectrum Transceivers Installation and Operation Guide –
MDS Doc. 05-3301A01, Rev. B, April 2000 (PDF = 3301B-x810.pdf) for model MDS 9810
MDS 9710A Remote Data Transceiver (Radio)
MDS 4710/9710 Series 400MHz/900 MHz Remote Data Transceiver – MDS Doc. 05-3305A01,
Rev. B, Sept. 2000 (Installation & Operation) (PDF = 3305B-710AC.pdf) for model MDS 9710A
MDS 9710B Data Transceiver (Radio)
MDS 4710B/9710B Data Transceiver Installation and Operation Guide – MDS Doc. 05-3316A01, Rev. E,
Sept. 2000 (PDF = 3316E-x710B.pdf) for model MDS 9710B
FreeWave Radio Spread Spectrum Data Transceiver Model FGRM-501X005
Contact the FreeWave Tech Support group @ 303-444-3862 or at www.freewave.com to request the latest copy of the user manual.
0-4 / Contents CI-3530-15B
Section 1
INTRODUCTION
1.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
TeleRTU Ô Model 3530-15B provides a high performance and economical choice for control and measurement in the following applications:
$ SCADA RTU
$ Lift Stations
$ Metering Stations
$ Well Monitoring
$ Reservoir and Tank Monitoring
$ Pump Controller
$ Custody Transfer
$ Pressure Monitor
In addition to operation in an unprotected outdoor environment, the TeleRTU has been designed to provide the following key features:
$ Very low power consumption
$ Two independent serial ports
$ Two line alphanumeric display
$ Two discrete outputs with control capability & Two discrete inputs
$ Four analog inputs
$ Two high speed counter or two pulse inputs
$ Two pulse inputs
$ UL approved for Class I, Division 2 Groups C & D Hazardous Locations
1.2 PHYSICAL DESCRIPTION
TeleRTUs are comprised of the following major components:
$ Enclosure
$ Circuit (CPU) Board
$ Internal mounting brackets
$ Display/Switch Panel Assembly
$ Serial communications ports
$ 12V, 7 Amp. Hour Battery
Additionally the TeleRTU has been designed to support the following options:
$ Solar Panel option (see Section 1.3.1)
$ Comm. option (see Section 1.3.2) (see appropriate modem manual or Appendix H for
MDS Radios or Appendix I for FreeWave Radio)
$ Expansion Transmitter Interface option (see Section 1.3.3 & PIP-EXPTIBTF)
$ Expansion Comm. Port RS-232 Board option (see Section 1.3.4 & PIP-EXP232TF)
$ Expansion RS-485 and/or Analog Output Board option (see Section 1.3.5 & PIP-
EXP485/AO)
$ Field wiring options
TeleRTU™ Introduction / 1-1
1.2.1 Enclosure
The enclosure is custom molded in Lexan 503 plastic. Its external dimensions are 10.14” high by 10.375” wide by 7.4175” deep. An installed TeleCounter Assembly adds 4.36” to the height. The enclosure consists of two pieces, the body and the Instrument Front Cover. A continuous gasket seals the unit when the Instrument Front Cover is closed. A hinge on the right side (facing the front of the unit) is formed by molded channels on the Instrument
Front Cover and body that capture a stainless steel pin. When closed, the Instrument
Front Cover is secured by three captive quarter turn fasteners along the left side. A hole is provided on the left side to allow the use of a padlock to secure the Instrument Front
Cover.
1-2 / Introduction
Figure 1-1 - TeleRTU J
TeleRTU™
Figure 1-2 - TeleRTU™ CPU Board
1.2.2 TeleRTU CPU Board
The TeleRTU CPU circuit board is mounts on the right side of the enclosure, attached to standoffs on the Mounting Bracket by three screws and two posts. The board is approximately 7.3” tall, 4.6” wide, and 0.7” deep. Both surface mount and through-hole components are located on the component side of the board, and small surface mount components are located on the solder side.
TeleRTU™ Introduction / 1-3
Pluggable screw terminal connectors line the front edge of the board, along with two LED indicators and a potentiometer for display contrast adjustment.
Figure 1-3 - Opened TeleRTU with 12V Battery Option
Radio/Modem Mounting Bracket Removed
1-4 / Introduction TeleRTU™
1.2.3 Internal Mounting Brackets
Aluminum brackets attach to the interior of the enclosure body to support the CPU circuit board, battery, and communications options. Another bracket attaches to the inside of the
Instrument Front Cover to support the LCD Display and Switch Panel.
1.2.4 Display/Switch Panel Assembly
The Display/Switch Panel Assembly mounts to the inside of the Instrument Front Cover where it is visible through a window. This Assembly consists of the LCD Display
Subassembly and the Membrane Switch Assembly. A Gasket (on the inside of the cover) provides a seal between the LCD Display Subassembly and the Instrument Front Cover.
Both the LCD Display Subassembly and the Membrane Switch Panel connect to the CPU
Board through dedicated ribbon cables. The Membrane Switch is used to activate the 2 X
16 Character LCD Display.
In normal operation, the display stays off after the unit has been configured and placed into service. The operator may activate the display at any time by pressing the front panel button. When activated, the display scrolls through a list of current values. The list defaults to an appropriate set of values.
When the button is pressed (or a properly configured cable is plugged into the Local Port), the TeleRTU J wakes up from sleep mode and enters calculation mode, where all circuits except the RS-232 transceiver are active. While cycling through the display list, the calculation interval switches to 1 second. After cycling through the list twice, the calculation interval is restored to the programmed interval and the unit returns to normal operation. Although the RS-232 transceiver is disabled while in calculation mode or sleep mode, the receiver channel dedicated to buffering Receive Data Carrier Detect (RDCD) is always active.
1.2.5 Serial Communications Ports
The TeleRTU J provides two serial ports for serial communications, designated the network port (9600 bps - Default) and the local port (19200 bps - default). Both ports operate independently at rates up to 19.2 Kbps. Prior to receiving the ACCOL load, the network port is a standard BSAP slave port and the local port is a BSAP pseudo-slave port for direct connect communication with various BBI programs running on a laptop PC. Note that on the local port with a direct connect, the TeleRTU J will answer to any local BSAP node address.
In a BSAP network, the TeleRTU J may be used as a slave node. As such it is not capable of initiating a BSAP message intended for another node. The TeleRTU J is always an immediate response node.
A circular plastic connector on the bottom of the enclosure body provides connection for a local communications device, typically an IBM compatible PC (personal computer). A custom cable connects the PC serial port to the TeleRTU J . Internally, the circular connector is wired to field wiring terminals on the CPU circuit board.
TeleRTU™ Introduction / 1-5
1.2.5.1 BSAP Message Support
The TeleRTU J supports a subset of BSAP messages. Specifically, the following messages are supported:
Poll message
TS/NRT message
Alarm Acknowledge
Alarm Initialization
Peer to Peer
RDB Functions
Normal response to poll messages including alarm reporting in short, long, and extended format. If a poll is received on the network port, and the TeleRTU has no NRT, it will respond with a request for a Node Routing Table.
Normal handling.
Normal handling.
Normal handling.
Supports send and poll mode.
Supports read signal by name and address, read packed logical, read by list, read selected signal data (name match only), read array sizes, read by data array number (short form
& general form), by name and address, write by list, and write by data array number (short form & general form).
Supports Audit Trial functions, security code functions,
EBSAP Group functions, archive data functions, read array elements, and read special information: read version, features,
PROM link. All subfunctions of these are supported.
Special RDB Functions Supports date and time requests, local BSAP address requests, and the system reset request.
1.2.6 12V Battery
The 12V Sealed Lead-Acid battery is rated for 7 Amp Hours and mounts to the left of the
CPU board and is secured by a Battery Mounting Bracket and the Radio/Modem Option
Mounting Bracket. The battery connects to J2 on the CPU board.
1.2.7 Field Wiring
The TeleRTU supports connection to external devices through its field wiring terminals on the CPU board.
$ Digital inputs
$ Digital outputs
$ Pulse inputs
$ Analog inputs
$ External communications
1.3 OPTIONS
The following options are covered in sections 1.3.1 through 1.3.5 respectively; Solar Panel option, Communications option, Expansion TIB option, Expansion Communications Port
RS-232 Board option and Expansion RS-485 and/or Analog Output Board option..
1-6 / Introduction TeleRTU™
1.3.1 Solar Panel Option
A 12V, 5 watt solar panel can be used with the rechargeable battery. This solar panel can be mounted to a 2" to 2.375” pipe. The solar panel mounts on a bracket that offers adjustable swivel and fixed tilt angles. The solar panel wires enter the TeleFlow through a liquid tight conduit fitting on the bottom of the enclosure. Internally the solar panel wires connect to the rechargeable battery via the CPU board connector J1’s PWR (red wire) and
GND (black wire) terminals.
1.3.2 Communications Option
Either a 9600 PSTN modem or a radio (with integral modem) can be mounted inside the
TeleFlow Plus enclosure. The modem option will typically connect to the rechargeable battery via the CPU Board connector J2’s PWR 1 and GND terminals. The radio is supplied power from the CPU Board connector J4’s AUX PWR and GND terminals. The modem’s communication lines are interfaced via a wiring harness connected to CPU Board
Connector J8 and the modem’s 9-pin D-type connector. The MDS Radio’s communication lines are interfaced between the radio’s 25-pin D-type connector and CPU Board connectors
J7, J8 and J10. The FreeWave Radio’s communication lines are interfaced between the radio’s 10-pin connector and CPU Board connector J8.
1.3.3 Expansion Transmitter Interface Board (ETIB) Option
Expansion Transmitter Interface Boards (ETIBs) allow up to two (2) Bristol Babcock,
Series 3508C Transmitters to communicate with an ACCOL loaded host TeleFlow or
TeleFlow Plus Electronic Gas Measurement Computer (EGMC) (3530-10B/20B), or a
TeleRTU, TeleRTU Plus or TeleRTU Module (3530-15B/25B/35B). The EGMC/RTU polls and stores data from each transmitter and communicates with the network.
TeleRTU™
Figure 1-3 - Expansion Transmitter Interface Board
Introduction / 1-7
The ETIB Board is interfaced to a TeleFlow/TeleRTU CPU Board via the CPU Board’s
Expansion Connector. Power from and communication with the host CPU Board is supplied through the Expansion Connector. ETIB Boards contain one jumper (JP1) for configuration purposes.
1.3.4 Expansion Communications Port RS-232 Board Option
The Expansion Communications Port RS-232 Board (EXPCOM232) provides a single RS-
232 asynchronous serial communications port to ACCOL-based 3530-XXX models. In addition to assignments of the resident (host) CPU’s “local” and “network” RS-232 ports, any model 3530-XXX unit equipped with an EXPCOM232 Board can establish RS-232 communications with an external device. An EXPCOM232 Board plugs into the Expansion
Connector of the TeleFlow or TeleRTU CPU Board and is stood-off by three 15/32” long hex standoffs and is secured via three screws. The CPU Board Expansion Connector supplies power and 3530-XXX communication to the EXPCOM232 Board.
Programmable baud rates up to 19.2Kbps are supported by the EXPCOM232 Board. TXD,
RXD, RTS, CTS, DTR, CD and GND (RS-232) signals are available at TB1 of the
EXPCOM232 Board. CD (Carrier Detect) (supplied by a DCE attempting to communicate with a model 3530-XXX), will awaken the 3530-XXX CPU Board. If no activity is required, the EXPCOM232 Board‘s serial communications controller (SCC) chip and RS-232 drivers can be put to sleep (low power mode) along with the host/parent 3530-XXX.
Figure 1-4 - Expansion Communications Port RS-232 Board
1.3.5 Expansion RS-485 and/or Analog Output Board Option
The Expansion RS-485 Comm. Port with Analog Output Board (EXP485/AO) provides a single RS-485 communications port to ACCOL-based 3530-XXX models. In addition to assignments of the resident (host) CPU’s “local” and “network” RS-232 ports, any model
1-8 / Introduction TeleRTU™
3530-XXX unit equipped with a fully populated EXP485/AO Board can establish RS-485 communications with other 3530-XXX devices and/or interface to an Analog Output circuit.
The EXP485/AO Board plugs into the Expansion Connector of the TeleFlow or TeleRTU
CPU Board, is stood-off by three 15/32” long hex standoffs and is secured via three screws.
The CPU Board Expansion Connector supplies power and 3530-XXX communication to the
EXP485/AO Board.
Programmable baud rates up to 19.2Kbps are supported by the EXP485/AO Board.
Interface signals are available at TB1 of the EXP485/AO. The SLEEP+ and SLEEP- signals
(supplied by the Master 3530-XXX) will awaken the remote 3530-XXXCPU Boards. If no activity is required, the EXP485/AO Board’s serial communications controller (SCC) chip and RS-485 drivers can be put to sleep (low power mode) along with the host/parent 3530-
XXX.
Figure 1-5 - Expansion RS-485 and/or Analog Output Board
1.4 ENVIRONMENT
The TeleRTU J operates in an unprotected outdoor environment. See Table 1-1 below for environmental specifications.
Table 1-1 - ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS
TOPIC
Operating Temp. Range
Operating Humidity Range
Transient Susceptibility
Vibration Effect
ESD Susceptibility
SPECIFICATION
-40 E to +60 E C (-40 E to +140 E F)
15% to 90% RH Noncondensing
Field connected circuits meet the requirements of ANSI/IEEE
C37.90-1980 (formerly IEEE 472) for surge withstand capability.
Less than " 0.1% FS for (15 to 150)Hz at 2g and (150-2K)Hz at 1g on any axis per SAMA PMC.31.1.
Meets ESD withstand capability up to 10KV (No Damage).
TeleRTU™ Introduction / 1-9
Table 1-1 - ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS (Continued)
TOPIC
EMI Susceptibility
Hazardous Locations
SPECIFICATION
Meets SAMA PMC 33.1-1978 from 20MHz to 500 MHz. Effect on pressure and temperature reading is less than " 0.25% FS.
Nonincendive for use in Class I, Division 2, Groups C & D hazardous locations (in certain configurations - see Section 5.1 for model numbers)(see Appendix A).
1.5 MODEL NUMBER ANALYSIS
The model number is stamped on a plate affixed to the inside of the Instrument Front
Cover. The RTU’s general features can be identified by comparing the data plate number to
Table 1-2.
Table 1-2 - MODEL NUMBER BREAKDOWN
Sample Model Number -
3530-15B-AB-CD-EFG-H ß Table Reference
3530-15B-01-02-010-1 ß Model Number
A B = PACKAGING
0 1 BASIC PARTS
0 2 SPECIAL
C D = APPLICATION PROGRAM*
0 2 ACCOL
0 9 CUSTOM PROGRAM
E F = POWER SYSTEM
(* = ANY SELECTION)
(# = 1 OR 2)
0 0 EXTERNAL WITH RS-232
0 # EXTERNAL WITH RADIO
OR MODEM
6 * 12V, 7AH LEAD ACID BATTERY
5W, 12V SOLAR PANEL SYSTEM
F = COMMUNICATION
0 RS-232
1 RADIO
2 MODEM
G = CERTIFICATION
(* = ANY SELECTION)
0 NONE
2 CLASS 1, DIV 2 (NON-INCENDIVE)
H = EXPANSION BOARDS
0 NONE
1 EXPANSION TIB
2 EXPANSION RS232
3 EXPANSION RS485
Note: Table 1-2 is only provided for product identity and not for sales ordering purposes.
Note: Field changeable items may not match the unit’s Model Number as shipped from the factory.
1-10 / Introduction TeleRTU™
Section 1A
APPLICATION SOFTWARE
3530-15B
3530-20B
3530-20B
3530-20B
3530-25B
3530-25B
3530-35B
3530-35B
3530-45B
3530-45B
3530-50B
3530-50B
3530-50B
3530-55B
3530-55B
1A.1 CATEGORIES OF APPLICATION SOFTWARE
All TeleFlow GFC (Gas Flow Computer), TeleFlow Corrector, TeleRTU and TeleRecorder units have the option of running a user generated ACCOL load. In addition, Fixed ‘ C ’ application loads are available for the TeleFlow GFC and the TeleFlow Corrector, a standard
BBI ACCOL load (or a variation) is available for the TeleFlow GFC, the TeleCorrector and
TeleRecorders. Additionally, ACCOL based TeleFlow GFC, TeleFlow Corrector, TeleRTU and TeleRecorder users have the option of using UOI or TMS to view menus, and UOI configuration tools to modify menus. Units that have a Low Power I/O Expansion Board installed have the option of utilizing the 2-Run ACCOL load.
With respect to the program load, TeleRTU units that don’t contain a Low Power I/O
Expansion Board (3530-15B/25B/35B) do not have a standard BBI ACCOL load installed; the user must create and download their own ACCOL load.
Table 1A-1 provides a list of the TeleFlow GFC, TeleFlow Corrector, TeleRTU and
TeleRecorder program loads.
Table 1A-1
TeleFlow (3530-10B/20B), TeleFlow Corrector (3530-50B),
TeleRTU (3530-15B/25B/35B) & TeleRecorder (3530-45B/55B) Program Loads
Model #
3530-10B
3530-10B
3530-10B
Program Load
Fixed ‘ C ’ Program
Standard BBI ACCOL Load
User-created ACCOL load
User-created ACCOL load
Fixed ‘ C ’ Program
User-created ACCOL load
Standard BBI ACCOL Load or 2-Run ACCOL Load
User-created ACCOL load
Standard BBI ACCOL Load or 2-Run ACCOL Load
User-created ACCOL load
Standard BBI ACCOL Load or 2-Run ACCOL Load
TeleRecorder ACCOL load
User-created ACCOL load
Fixed ‘ C ’ Program
TeleCorrector ACCOL load
User-created ACCOL load
TeleRecorder ACCOL load
User-created ACCOL load
Operator Interface/Configuration
TeleFlow Menu System (TMS)
TMS or UOI Menu System Interface.
- ACCOL Workbench is used to create the load.
- Open BSI Utilities is used to download and communicate.
- User created/modified menus via UOI.
See 3530-10B with user-created ACCOL load.
TeleFlow Menu System (TMS)
See 3530-10B with user-created ACCOL load.
TMS or UOI Menu System Interface.
See 3530-10B with user-created ACCOL load.
TMS or UOI Menu System Interface.
See 3530-10B with user-created ACCOL load.
TMS or UOI Menu System Interface.
UOI Menu System Interface.
See 3530-10B with user-created ACCOL load.
TeleFlow Menu System (TMS)
TMS or UOI Menu System Interface.
See 3530-10B with user-created ACCOL load.
UOI Menu System Interface.
See 3530-10B with user-created ACCOL load.
TeleFlow 3530-XXX Application Software / 1A-1
There are basically three categories of application software used with the TeleFlow GFC,
TeleFlow Corrector, TeleRTU and TeleRecorder series:
1) ACCOL Tools and related software which are used to program your TeleFlow GFC,
TeleFlow Corrector, TeleRTU (Remote Terminal Unit) or TeleRecorder for its intended application (pump control, pipeline monitoring, etc.). In general, the System Engineer or ACCOL programmer uses this type of software.
2) Supervisory Software which is used to allow operator interaction with the controller via graphical displays, trending, and printed reports. In general, this type of software is used by the Process Operator, or Technician.
3) Open BSI Utilities Software which facilitates communication between the TeleFlow
GFC, TeleFlow Corrector, TeleRTU and/or TeleRecorder and certain types of Supervisory software. In general, the System Engineer configures this software.
Each of these application software categories will be discussed briefly in this section. Additional information on these subjects is found in documents referenced within the text.
1A.2 ACCOL TOOLS SOFTWARE
ACCOL stands for A dvanced C ommunications and C ontrolO riented L anguage, and is
Bristol Babcock's proprietary language for programming Network 3000-series controllers, such as the TeleFlow GFC, TeleFlow Corrector, the TeleRTU and the TeleRecorder. The
ACCOL compilers and related software are collectively referred to as the ACCOL Tools.
Each of these tools will be discussed later in this section.
The ACCOL language includes a large set of pre-programmed software modules and control statements which can perform various mathematical, logical, process control, or communication functions.
For example, the PID3TERM module allows proportional, integral, and derivative control over a process input value; the AGA3ITER module computes natural gas volume flow rates, and the DIFFERENTIATOR module calculates the rate of change of an input. There are over 100 different modules and control statements to choose from. For more detailed information on particular modules or statements, see the ACCOL II Reference Manual
(document # D4044).
These modules and control statements are organized by the ACCOL programmer into individual tasks . Each task is specified to execute at a specific rate, and with a specific priority, relative to other tasks. One or more tasks are then combined by the ACCOL programmer into an ACCOL program. This program must be tailored for the particular use of this controller, for example, measuring and controlling natural gas flows, monitoring pressure of a pump, etc.
Depending upon which ACCOL Tools you are using, your ACCOL program is initially created either as ASCII text in an ACCOL source file (.ACC file) or as binary data in an
ACCOL object file (.ACO file). Facilities exist for quickly translating between these two formats.
1A2 / Application Software TeleFlow 3530-XXX
When editing of the ACCOL program has been completed, it must be compiled and linked to generate an ACCOL load file . The ACCOL load file contains the original programming instructions in a machine-readable format that can be executed by the TeleFlow GFC,
TeleFlow Corrector, TeleRTU and TeleRecorder. In order to get the load file into the controller, the file is downloaded into the TeleFlow GFC, TeleFlow Corrector, TeleRTU or
TeleRecorder, which then executes the programming instructions in the load file.
The Windows Ô -based ACCOL Workbench software allows you to create, modify, compile, link, and document an ACCOL source file, all using a single integrated tool. Workbench allows direct editing of an ACCOL source file, without the need for a separate ASCII text editor, and allows the user to call up a pre-defined template of any ACCOL module or statement. The user can then edit the template to conform to the requirements of the intended application. See the ACCOL Workbench User Manual (document # D4051) for more information.
(NOTE: All workbench on-line communication and downloading is facilitated via Open
BSI Utilities software, discussed later in this chapter).
Figure 1A-1 - Files Created by Windows-based ACCOL Workbench
1A.3 SUPERVISORY SOFTWARE
Supervisory software allows operator interaction with the Bristol Babcock controllers via graphical displays, trends, and reports of historical data. Generally, the supervisory
TeleFlow 3530-XXX Application Software / 1A-3
software requires a customized communication driver in order to communicate with the
Bristol devices. In some cases this is provided via Open BSI Utilities.
Among the types of supervisory software currently supported are:
1) OpenEnterprise software is Bristol Babcock's own supervisory system. OpenEnterprise utilizes a Windows Ô NT server and one or more PC client workstations. Communication with the controller network is supported via Open BSI. OpenEnterprise provides large real time and historical data bases, which may be displayed, logged, or exported.
2) UOI or TMS are DOS-based programs, which allow an operator to view text-based menus. Operators can view process data, modify TeleFlow parameters, and collect log information, see the UOI Configuration Manual (document # D5074) and the UOI
Operators Manual (document # D5075). For information on using TMS and TeleFlow menus, see Appendix F of documents CI-3530-10B, CI-3530-20B, or CI-3530-50B.
3) Iconics Inc. Genesis software is a popular PC-based supervisory package that is suitable for systems with smaller numbers of ACCOL signals. Genesis, and the Bristol driver may be purchased from Bristol Babcock (see "Local Area Network" on page 7).
4) Intellution ® FIX ® software is a powerful PC-based graphical user interface package, suitable for high-end systems. Open BSI Utilities software is required for communications.
1A.4 OPEN BSI UTILITIES SOFTWARE
The Open Bristol System Interface (Open BSI) is a layer of communications software which provides access to a network of Bristol Babcock remote process controllers. Above this communications layer are a group of applications (programs) which are collectively known as the Open BSI Utilities . These utilities interact with the communications layer to:
$ Download ACCOL load files to 33xx controllers and/or TeleFlow GFC, TeleFlow
Corrector, TeleRTU and TeleRecorder units in the network
$ Collect and display data from the 3xxx controllers and/or TeleFlow GFC, TeleFlow
Corrector, TeleRTU and TeleRecorder units
$ Monitor and control Open BSI communications
Third-party supervisory software, such as Intellution ® FIX ® , can also use Open BSI communications, and data files generated by Open BSI utilities, to access the Bristol network in order to display and report information from field instrumentation about a running process. An operator then uses this information to monitor and/or interact with the process.
The standard set of Open BSI utilities is accessed from within a Windows program group on the PC; the major utilities are described, briefly, below. Full details on each utility are included in the Open BSI Utilities Manual (D5081).
1A4 / Application Software TeleFlow 3530-XXX
Figure 1A-2 - Open BSI Interface Diagram
NetView allows the user to define communication network characteristics, define details about individual Controllers, Correctors, RTUs and Recorders, and to change these characteristics on-line. It also allows monitoring of communication statistics from the workstation end of the communication line.
Downloader transfers a linked ACCOL load file (*.ACL) to a remote 3xxx unit.
DataView collects and displays several types of process data from a 3xxx-series controller, including signal values, data array values, signal lists, archive data, and audit trail information. In addition, it allows the user to search for signals based on various criteria.
Remote Communication Statistics Tool allows additional monitoring of Open BSI communication information. Details on buffers, communication ports, and custom protocols are accessible via this tool. Some of the information collected via this tool is primarily of interest to Bristol Babcock support personnel.
SigWrite reads ASCII files containing ACCOL signal values, and writes those values to corresponding signals or signal lists in a 3xxx controller. SigWrite scans for such files at a user-definable interval.
In addition to the standard set of Open BSI Utilities, just described, there are other utilities, available from Bristol Babcock as add-ons to the standard utilities, which provide
TeleFlow 3530-XXX Application Software / 1A-5
capabilities for scheduled data collection, and file export. These utilities include the Open
BSI Scheduler, the Open BSI DDE Server, and the Open BSI Data Collector. See the Open
BSI Scheduler Manual (document # D5082) and the Open BSI Collection & Export Utilities
Manual (document # D5083) for details.
For more information on these packages, consult the manuals accompanying them, or contact Bristol Babcock's application support group for assistance.
1A.5 SYSTEM APPLICATIONS
A TeleFlow GFC, TeleFlow Corrector, TeleRTU or TeleRecorder can operate as an independent, stand-alone unit, or as a node in a local or wide area network. These applications are described in sections 1A.5.1 through 1A.5.3.
Note: The TeleFlow GFC, TeleFlow Corrector, TeleRTU or TeleRecorder cannot serve as a serial Communications Front End (CFE) or Data Concentrator (DC).
1A.5.1 Stand-Alone Unit
Figure 1A-3 shows a TeleFlow GFC, TeleFlow Corrector, TeleRTU or TeleRecorder used as a stand-alone unit in a non-network application. This arrangement is ideal for small local systems requiring a limited number of monitoring and control points. The PC for this application runs Bristol Babcock's ACCOL Workbench Software and Open BSI Utilities.
Data stored in the TeleFlow GFC, TeleFlow Corrector, TeleRTU or TeleRecorder can be observed or edited via the PC.
Once on line, the TeleFlow GFC, TeleFlow Corrector, TeleRTU or TeleRecorder executes the
ACCOL load and performs its configured tasks. Although the PC is attached to the Model
3530-XXX in Figure 1A-3, it can be disconnected and removed once the 3530-XX-X unit has been loaded and made operational.
Figure 1A-3 - Basic Stand-Alone Application
1A6 / Application Software TeleFlow 3530-XXX
1A.5.2 Local Area Network (LAN)
LANs typically support the communications requirements of computers and equipment in one or more buildings at a site or plant complex. A local area network requires a PC with extended graphics capability. This PC will typically run a supervisory software package to display process parameters, real time or historical process data, and graphic displays, etc.
An example of a local area network is shown in Figure 1A-4. This network can communicate directly through RS-485 cable connections for short distances (1000 feet max. from master to most distant slave) or over longer distances when interconnected on RS-232 ports. For much greater distances (miles) network communications require the use of phone line modems, fiber modems or broadband/carrier band modems (on coaxial cable).
Figure 1A-4 shows a network that contains a PC as the network master and a DPC 3330 at the first level of the network hierarchy. The data concentrator, which functions as a communications traffic director, communicates upward with the PC through a slave (S) port and downward with the second level through a master (M) port. This pattern repeats through each descending level. The second level contains two controllers; one communicates with three other controllers at the third level, while the other communicates with two at the third level. Each master (configured) port has the capability of supporting up to 127 slaves.
The network communication port of each TeleFlow GFC, TeleFlow Corrector, TeleRTU or
TeleRecorder requires either TMS or ACCOL configuration to change the 9600 bps default rate. The network port operates at rates up to 19.2 Kbps. Additionally, in a BSAP network, the network communication port must be defined in the ACCOL load using Workbench
Software. The network port is a standard BSAP slave port with alarm support intended for remote communication via a BSAP network.
All TeleFlow GFCs, TeleFlow Correctors, TeleRTUs and TeleRecorders act as terminal slave nodes in the BSAP network. As such, they are not capable of initiating a BSAP message intended for another node. These units are always immediate response nodes.
The PC, which runs the supervisory software, oversees the activities of the local area network. It displays process parameters, real-time data, and historical process information in both tabular and graphic formats. Journaling and system configuration utilities can also be employed as required.
The Bristol Babcock NETWORK 3000 system supports a maximum of six levels starting with the master device at level 1. Slave nodes at each descending level communicate upward through its preceding master node. Each master node stores data from its slaves until polled.
A local area network can also include printers and/or display terminals. Figure 1A-4 shows a printer connected directly to a PC port; however, a controller port could have been configured as a logger and used in the same manner.
TeleFlow 3530-XXX Application Software / 1A-7
1A8 / Application Software
Figure 1A-4 - Local Area Network
TeleFlow 3530-XXX
1A.5.3 Wide Area Network (WAN)
WANs typically support the communications requirements of computers and equipment at numerous geographical locations and may encompass many local and remote sites. A
Network 3000 system can also be constructed as a wide area network encompassing many local area networks. This application places a dedicated “Area Operator” computer at the top of the hierarchy as shown in Figure 1A-5. The central system includes the interface, monitoring and data recording equipment necessary to operate all the subservient networks. The central system employs Open BSI software to provide the on-line network interface.
Figure 1A-5 - An Example of a Wide Area Network
The Area Operator computer running Open BSI software provides the operator with realtime communications with remotes. Depending on the associated Man Machine Interface
(MMI) software package (such as OpenEnterprise, Genesis, Winterm, moXi, FIX, etc.), various features such as real-time management, historical data, alarm logging, event journaling, color graphics, CRT trending, report logging, process modeling, supervisory control, and high-level language support may be employed. The Area Operator PC of Figure
1A-5 communicates with the local area networks and discrete remote BBI RTUs, Flow
Computers and a Smart Transmitter through a DPC 3330. Depending on the configuration
TeleFlow 3530-XXX Application Software / 1A-9
of the DPC 3330, four or more asynchronous channels for use with phone line or modem applications, as well as a single, redundant channel for data highway applications may be utilized.
1A10 / Application Software TeleFlow 3530-XXX
Section 2
INSTALLATION & OPERATION
2.1 INSTALLATION IN HAZARDOUS AREAS
TeleRTUs J are furnished in a housing designed to meet the NEMA Type 4X specifications and to operate in a Class I, Division 2, Groups C & D environment with a nonincendive rating (see Appendix A).
Figure 2-1 - Top View of TeleRTU Mounted to a 2 Inch Pipe
2.2 TeleRTU INSTALLATION SITE CONSIDERATIONS
Check all clearances when choosing an installation site. Make sure that the TeleRTU will be accessible for wiring and service. To install a TeleRTU unit, see Section 2.3.
2.2.1 Temperature Limits
The TeleRTU has been designed to operate over a -40 to 140 o F (-40 to +60 o C) temperature range. Operation beyond this temperature range could cause output errors and erratic performance. Prolonged operation under extreme conditions could also result in failure of the unit.
2.2.2 Vibration Limits
Check the mounting pipe for mechanical vibration. Make sure that the TeleRTU is not exposed to a level of vibration that exceeds those given in the specifications. The TeleRTU limits are 2g for 15-150 Hz & 1g for 150-2000 Hz.
2.2.3 Opening The Instrument Front Cover
The Instrument Front Cover must be opened to access the electrical wiring terminals on the
TeleRTU J CPU Board and on the various options. The Instrument Front Cover is hinged
TeleRTU J Installation /Operation/ 2-1
on the right side and is secured on the left side by three captive quarter turn fasteners.
Additionally, aligned holes in the Instrument front Cover and body have been provided to accommodate a padlock or other securing device.
Figure 2-2 - TeleRTU J CPU Board
2.2.4 CPU Board Configuration (see Figure 2-2)
The TeleRTU J CPU Board contains three (3) sets of User Configurable Jumpers that provide configuration selection as follows:
2.2.4.1 JP3 Battery Backup Enable
When JP3 is open, the battery is disabled. When JP3 is installed, the battery maintains the contents of the RAM and the Real Time Clock while power is less than 3.6 VDC. When main
2-2 / Installation/Operation TeleRTU J
power is connected and is greater than 3.6VDC, no current will be drawn from the backup battery regardless of the state of JP3.
2.2.4.2 JP4 Security (Manufacturing Tests Only)
Jumper JP4 is used to prevent the occurrence of ACCOL downloads or Firmware FLASH loads.
2.2.4.3 JP5 Manual Reset
For normal operation, JP5 is left open. When the Shunt Jumper associated with JP5 is installed, the TeleRTU J is held in a reset condition, with all processing halted. When JP5 is removed, normal operation will resume.
2.3 TeleRTU INSTALLATION/CONFIGURATION
2.3.1 Overview of TeleRTU Configuration
An overview of the steps required to configure a Model 3530-15B TeleRTU Remote Terminal
Unit is provided below.
Step 1. Hardware Configuration
This involves unpacking the Model 3530-15B TeleRTU hardware, mounting the unit, wiring
I/O terminations, making proper ground connections and connecting a communication cable to the PC workstation. To install and configure the Model 3530-15B TeleRTU follow hardware configuration steps 1 through 4 below. For network configuration see Section
2.3.3.
1. Remove the unit from its carton. Install appropriate I/O wiring to the CPU Board’s removable terminal blocks (see Sections 2.3.4 through 2.3.4.4). Install field wiring associated with any optional I/O board to the appropriate terminal blocks (see the appropriate PIP - Product Information Package).
2. Install a ground wire between the Chassis Ground Lug and a known good Earth
Ground (see Section 2.3.2.4).
3. Connect DC Power to the TeleRTU CPU Board. 12 Vdc Battery Terminals PWR 1
(P1) and GND (G2) should be plugged into connector J2 on the CPU Board.
4. Configure/Connect appropriate communication port(s) (see Section 2.3.3). Connect the Local Port of the TeleRTU to the PC workstation, and apply power.
Step 2. Software Installation on the PC Workstation
ACCOL software must be installed on the PC workstation. This is accomplished by installing the ACCOL Workbench Kit from the Open BSI CD ROM.
If you will be including the TeleRTU in an Open BSI network, you should also install the
Open BSI Essentials Kit which includes the NetView software.
For information on minimum system requirements and more details of the installation, and registration process see Chapter 2 of the Open BSI Utilities Manual (document # D5081).
TeleRTU J Installation /Operation/ 2-3
Step 3. Create an ACCOL Load Using ACCOL Workbench
ACCOL stands for A dvanced C ommunications and C ontrolO riented L anguage, and is
Bristol Babcock's proprietary language for programming all Network 3000 controllers, including the TeleRTU. The ACCOL language includes a large set of pre-programmed software modules and control statements that can perform various mathematical, logical, process control, or communication functions. For introductory information on
ACCOL concepts, please see An Introduction to ACCOL (document# D4056). For detailed information on particular modules or statements, see the ACCOL II Reference Manual
(document # D4044).
All programming is performed using ACCOL Workbench software. ACCOL Workbench allows you to create, modify, compile, link, debug, and document an ACCOL program, all using a single integrated tool.
In ACCOL Workbench, you select pre-defined templates of various modules and control statements, and then edit them to suit your needs. Variables called signals are used to connect the modules together, and you combine the modules and statements into a logical sequence, referred to as an ACCOL task , which can execute at a specific rate. You design the task to meet the requirements of your intended application, such as measuring and controlling natural gas flow in a pipeline, controlling a pump, etc. You save the tasks and signals making up the ACCOL program as ASCII text in an ACCOL source file which has the file extension of (*.ACC). See the ACCOL Workbench User Manual (document # D4051) for more information on creating an ACCOL source file.
Note: When creating your ACCOL source file, be sure to include at least one
CALCULATOR Module, or IF-ELSE statement, as these are necessary for your
ACCOL file to be considered complete.
When you have finished editing your ACCOL source file, you compile and link it to generate a binary ACCOL Object (*.ACO) file, and an ACCOL Load (*.ACL) file. The ACCOL load file contains the original programming instructions in a machine-readable format, which can be executed by the TeleRTU. This load file will be downloaded into the TeleRTU (see
Step 6).
Step 4. Create an Open BSI Network Containing the TeleRTU unit, or ADD the
TeleRTU unit to an Existing Open BSI Network
In order for the TeleRTU unit to function as part of a Bristol Babcock network, it is necessary to include it in the Bristol Babcock BSAP network.
If no Bristol Babcock BSAP network exists:
You will need to start Open BSI’s NetView software on the PC workstation in order to define a Bristol Babcock BSAP network. A series of software wizards are used to define a
Network Host PC, a network, and the RTUs (controllers) belonging to the network.
Finally, communication lines must be specified which handle the address assigned to the
TeleRTU controller. Chapter 3 of the Open BSI Utilities Manual (document # D5081) includes ‘quick start’ examples for performing these steps. More detailed information is included in the NetView chapter (Chapter 6) of the same manual.
2-4 / Installation/Operation TeleRTU J
If a Bristol Babcock BSAP network already exists:
You will need to add the TeleRTU unit to the existing network using NetView’s RTU
Wizard. Chapter 6 of the Open BSI Utilities Manual (document # D5081) for details.
In either case, you will specify in software, a BSAP local address , which is a number from
1 to 127 that identifies the location of the TeleRTU in its particular level in the network.
Step 5. Establish Communications with the TeleRTU and set the BSAP Local
Address of the TeleRTU
The TeleRTU ships from the factory with its BSAP local address set to 127. You must change this number to whichever address you assigned in NetView software, in Step 4. The easiest way to do this is via the “Change Local Address” option in LocalView or NetView.
(See Section 2.4.1 for details).
Step 6. Download the ACCOL Load File into the TeleRTU
In order to get the ACCOL load file into the TeleRTU, the *.ACL file must be downloaded into it. The Open BSI Downloader can be accessed from within LocalView (see Section
2.4.2). After receiving the download, the TeleRTU will execute the programming instructions in the ACCOL load file, and will be ready for on-line operations.
2.3.2 Mounting the Model 3530-15B TeleRTU J Unit
Check all clearances when choosing an installation site. Make sure that the TeleRTUs J
Instrument Front Cover (hinged on right side) can be opened for wiring and service. Make certain that the LCD display and sensor switch is visible and accessible to the on-site operator. There should also be clearance for the optional Solar Panel (if required). The basic unit measures 10.375" in height by 10.14" in width by 7.4375" in depth. An optional
TeleCounter Assembly adds 4.36" to the height of the unit.
The TeleFlow is to be positioned vertically (base at bottom) and is to be mounted to a 2-inch pipe (clamped to the rear of the unit via two clamps and four bolts). The pipe is to be cemented into the ground deep enough to conform to local building codes associated with frost considerations (see Figure 2-1).
2.3.2.1 Wiring Notes
The field wiring terminals on the TeleRTU J CPU Board are accessed by opening the Instrument Front Cover. The CPU Board is mounted vertically (on edge) near the instrument’s right side such that the wiring connectors on the board's card edge are facing the front of the unit. Note: Exercise care when installing a conduit fitting or field wiring to prevent damage to the CPU Board and/or other system components.
2.3.2.2 Wire Routing
Wiring will enter the TeleRTU J through holes in the bottom of the case. Up to seven holes may be provided in the bottom of the case (in addition to the center hole that is plugged).
The purpose of each of these holes (see Figure 2-3) is provided as follows:
TeleRTU J Installation /Operation/ 2-5
$ (1) - A .437" hole accommodates the local port jack.
$ (2) - A .5" hole is plugged.
$ (3) - A .75” hole is provided to accommodate all DI/Os, Analog Inputs and Pulse Input
Wiring. This hole accommodates a .75” Liquid Tight Nonmetallic Conduit Fitting and is plugged when the unit is factory shipped.
$ (4) - A .406" hole accommodates the Battery Ventilation Assembly.
$ (5) - This hole accommodates input wiring from the optional solar panel. If the optional solar panel is not present, this hole is plugged.
$ (6) - This hole accommodates an antenna cable or Polyphaser or phone cord. If one of these items isn’t present, this hole is plugged.
$ (7) - Solderless Ground Lug
Figure 2-3 - TeleRTU (Bottom) Wiring Holes
2.3.2.3 Terminal Connections
This device uses compression-type terminals that accommodate up to #14 AWG wire. A connection is made by inserting the bared end (1/4 inch max.) into the clamp beneath the screw and securing the screw. The wire should be inserted fully to prevent short circuits.
Allow some slack in the wires when making terminal connections. The slack makes the connections more manageable and minimizes mechanical strain on the CPU Board and harnesses.
2.3.2.4 Signal Shielding and Grounding
TeleRTU units are provided with a Ground Lug that is situated on the bottom of the enclosure. Only units equipped with a modem MUST have the Ground Lug connected to a known good earth ground using wire no larger than #4 AWG in size. A cabinet ground cable situated inside the enclosure provides the interconnection between the modem’s protective surge circuitry and the unit’s Ground Lug. The use of twisted-pair, shielded and insulated
2-6 / Installation/Operation TeleRTU J
cable for I/O signal wiring will minimize signal errors caused by electromagnetic interference (EMI), radio frequency interference (RFI) and transients (see Supplement S1400A).
2.3.2.5 Power Connections
The unit is provided with four power connections, i.e., J1 (Solar Panel Power - PWR), J2
(Primary - PWR1), J3 (Secondary - PWR2) & J4 (Auxiliary Power - AUX PWR). Right angle
2-position harness connectors P1, P2, P3 and P4 are removable from the CPU board’s card edge to accommodate wiring when the unit is installed. Connectors J1, J2, J3 and J4 function as follows:
$ J1 - Solar Panel Power Jack
Solar power is interfaced via card edge connector J1, which utilizes a 2-connector right angle plug (P1) which can be unplugged from the edge of the PCB. This connector accommodates the input from a solar panel as follows:
Table 2-1 - Solar Panel Power Jack J1
J1 Pin
#
1
2
J1 Pin
Name
PWR
GND
Connection
SP Red Wire
SP Black Wire
$ J2 - Primary Power Jack
Primary power utilizes a 2-connector right angle plug (P2) that can be unplugged from the edge of the PCB. This connector accommodates the input from the battery and power to the optional Modem as follows:
Table 2-2 - Primary Power Plug J2
J2 Pin
#
1
2
J2 Pin
Name
Connection
PWR1 Red Wire Battery (+), Modem (TB4+)
GND Blk. Wire Battery (-), Modem (TB4-)
$ J3 - Secondary Power Jack
Secondary power utilizes a 2-connector right angle plug (P3) that can be unplugged from the card edge. This connector is used to install a temporary battery while the original battery is being replaced.
Table 2-3 - Secondary Power Jack J3
J3 Pin
#
1
2
J3 Pin
Name
Connection
PWR2 Battery (+)
GND Battery (-)
$ J4 - Auxiliary Power Output Jack
The auxiliary power output connector can be used to supply power to a communications device such as a Radio or Modem Option. This jack acts as an output supply that originates at the Primary Power Source. This output is not fused, so a fuse should be
TeleRTU J Installation /Operation/ 2-7
installed elsewhere in the circuitry. This fuse should not exceed a 2.5 Amp rating.
Connection to a load is accommodated as follows:
Table 2-4 - Auxiliary Power Output Jack J4
J4 Pin
#
1
2
J4 Pin
Name
Connection
AUX PWR Red Wire 12 VDC (+), Radio (J6+)
GND Blk. Wire Ground/return (-), Radio (J6-)
Modems are powered by the Auxiliary Power Output (Connector J4). Units shipped from the factory, with a modem installed, have the Auxiliary Power Output set ON in the standard load shipped with the product.
If you want the modem powered continuously, and
· you have since re-downloaded your standard load, or-
· you are running an ACCOL load other than the standard load shipped from the factory, or-
· you are installing a modem for a unit which originally shipped without a modem, then you MUST set the Auxiliary Power Output to ON. This can be accomplished, for standard loads, using the TeleFlow Menu System (TMS), by setting the Auxiliary Power
Output Default to ON via the Radio Communications Setup Menu (See Section F.8.5). If you are NOT using one of the standard loads, you must use the SYS_3530 Module in your
ACCOL Load to set the Auxiliary Power Default ON/OFF signal to ON. (This signal is Entry
1 in Parameter List 4 of the SYS_3530 Module, see ‘SYS_3530’ section in the ACCOL II
Reference Manual , document # D4044).
2.3.3 Communication Ports
2.3.3.1 RS-232 Network and Local Communications Ports
The TeleRTU provides a network (or remote) port and a customer port. Both ports provide for serial asynchronous communications compatible with RS-232 levels. These ports operate independently at baud rates up to 19.2Kbps.
2.3.3.2 Local Port
Table 2-5 - Local Port/PC Interconnect Cable Wiring
D Conn. Pin #
& Wire Color
5 (Black)
2 (White)
3 (Red)
N/A
N/A
VII
Plug Pin #
6
2
7
1*
4*
J7 Pin #
& Wire Color
1 (Black)
2 (Red)
3 (White)
4 (Green)
1 (Brown)
RTU Signal
Name
GND
LTXD
LRXD
Wake Up
GND
2-8 / Installation/Operation TeleRTU J
* T he green and brown wires are shorted together in the VII Plug/D Conn.
Wiring Harness and do not connect to the D-Type Connector. Pins 7 & 8 of the
D-Type Connector are shorted together.
Figure 2-4 - PC Connected to TeleRTU J Local Port
2.3.3.3 Network Port
The network port functions as a DTE (Data Terminal Equipment) device. The network port employs the standard RS-232 Interface signals for data transfer and handshaking.
Whenever the Carrier Detect Signal (RDCD) is active (RS-232 Mark or High Level), the
TeleRTU J exits sleep mode and stays in communication mode as long as the signal is active. The standard RS-232 signals are provided on the Network Port as follows:
Table 2-6 - Network Port Connections to the CPU Board
CPU Pin
#
J7-4
Name
Modem D-Conn.
# & Wire Color
WAKEUP N/A
Radio Conn. # &
Wire Color
(MDS/FreeWave)
6/N/A (Yellow)
TeleRTU Plus
Function
Wake Up
J8-1
J8-2
J8-3
J8-4
J8-5
J8-6
J8-7
J10-1
GND
RDCD
RDTR
RCTS
RRTS
RRXD
RTXD
AIN1
5 (Green)
1 (Gray)
4 (Yellow)
7 (Violet)*
7 (Orange)
2 (Blue)
3 (Brown)
N/A
7/6 (Black)
8/8 (Green)
N/A
5/10 (Brown)
4/9 (Blue)
3/7 (White)
2/5 (Red)
21 (Orange)
Ground
Data Carrier Detect Input
Data Term. Ready Output
Clear To Send Input
Request To Send Output
Receive Data Input
Transmit Data Output
Analog Input 1
* In the case of the TeleRTU’s modem harness, a violet wire connected to CPU board connector J8-4 (RCTS) is tied to the orange wire which is connected to
CPU board connector J8-5 (RRTS).
TeleRTU J Installation /Operation/ 2-9
Figure 2-5 - TeleRTU with Modem P/N 400000-01-6 Installed
2.3.3.4 Modem or Radio On Network Port
The RS-232 signals utilized by the optional radio or BBI PSTN modem are provided in
Table 2-6 above. Table 2-7 provides the power interconnects required for optional modem or radio usage. Table 2-7 also provides the 2-wire phone connections associated with the BBI
PSTN modem.
TeleRTU
Conn. & Sig. Name
J2-1 (PWR1)
J2-2 (GND)
J4-1 (AUX PWR)
J4-2 (GND)
J4-2 (GND)
-
-
Radio
Conn. & Name
-
-
13.8V (+Pwr.)
13.8V (-Pwr.)
Modem
Conn. & Sig. Name
-
-
TB4-1 (EXTVDC)
TB4-2 (GND)
TB1-1 (T/R)
TB1-2 (T/R)
Port
Usage
Power (+)
Pwr. Gnd. (-)
Modem Power (+)
Modem Pwr. Gnd. (-)
Phone Line
Phone Line
Table 2-7 - Wire Listing for Modem & Radio Power Connections
2-10 / Installation/Operation TeleRTU J
Figure 2-6 - TeleRTU with MDS Radio Installed
Illustrations of modem and radio equipped TeleRTUs J are provided in Figures 2-5 and 2-6 respectively. The option in question is secured to the Radio/Modem Mounting Bracket that accommodates its installation or removal. The option is easily installed onto or removed from the Battery Mounting Bracket.
For additional information about the MDS Radio option, refer to Appendix H.
For additional information about the FreeWave Radio option, refer to Appendix I.
For additional information on the BBI PSTN Modem, see the appropriate modem instruction manual.
2.3.4 Wiring Input/Output Signals
The TeleRTU J provides I/O termination for two (2) Discrete Inputs, two (2) Discrete
Outputs, four (4) Analog Inputs and two (2) 0-16V Pulse Input. The connections for each type are described as follows:
TeleRTU J Installation /Operation/ 2-11
2.3.4.1 Discrete Inputs (See Figure 2-7)
Two independent discrete input channels are available. Discrete Inputs are accepted from transistor, mechanical relays, TTL, CMOS and other devices that provide from 0 to 16 VDC.
These inputs are not isolated; therefore, field input devices which are not isolated must be referenced to the TeleRTU J Ground.
Figure 2-7 - Discrete Input Wired to TeleRTU J
Table 2-8 - Discrete Input Connections to J5
J5 Pin Signal
1
2
DIN0
GND
Function
Discrete Input 0
Ground
Table 2-9 - Discrete Input Connections to J6
J6 Pin Signal
1 DIN1
2 GND
Function
Discrete Input 1
Ground
2.3.4.2 Discrete Outputs (See Figure 2-8)
Two independent firmware controlled open drain discrete outputs are provided for control or signaling functions. Each output is wired to the source terminal of an N Channel MOSFET capable of switching up to 16 volts at up to 100mA. When closed, the FET shorts the output to ground with resistance of .5 ohms or less. These outputs are protected by 16V TVS diodes.
Because these outputs are not isolated, caution must be exercised to ensure that the load current does not affect operation of the TeleRTU J or related devices.
Table 2-10 - Discrete Output Connections to J5
J5 Pin
2
3
Signal Function
GND Ground
DOUT 0 Discrete Output 0
2-12 / Installation/Operation TeleRTU J
Table 2-11 - Discrete Output Connections to J6
J6 Pin
2
3
Signal
GND
Function
Ground
DOUT 1 Discrete Output 1
Figure 2-8 - Discrete Output Wired to TeleRTU J
2.3.4.3 Pulse Inputs (See Figure 2-9)
The TeleRTU J can accept pulse inputs from TTL or CMOS outputs, transistors, mechanical relays or other signaling devices. The maximum pulse frequency input is 5KHz with low impedance sources and 200Hz with high impedance sources such as Open Collector Drive
(see Figure 2-9).
TeleRTU J
J9 Pin
1
2
Figure 2-9 - Pulse Input Wired to TeleRTU
Table 2-12 - Pulse Input Connections to J9
Signal
GND
Function
Ground
PULSE 1 Pulse Input 1
J9 Pin
3
4
Signal
GND
Function
Ground
PULSE 2 Pulse Input 2
Installation /Operation/ 2-13
2.3.4.4 Analog Inputs (See Figure 2-10)
The 1 to 5 V Auxiliary Analog Inputs AI1 through AI4 can be supplied source power
(nominally +9.5V) to J10 Pin 2, J11 Pin 2, J12 Pin 2 or J13 Pin 2 (Excitation), respectively, through the CPU Board’s Transmitter Excitation Regulator which has a 20mA current limit. The resolution of the analog input is nominally 186 V.
Figure 2-10 - Analog Input Wired to TeleRTU
Table 2-13 - Analog Input Connections to J10
J10 Pin
1
2
3
Signal
AIN1
EXC
GND
Function
Analog Input 1
Excitation
Ground
Table 2-14 - Analog Input Connections to J11
J11 Pin
1
2
3
Signal
AIN2
EXC
GND
Function
Analog Input 2
Excitation
Ground
2-14 / Installation/Operation TeleRTU J
Table 2-15 - Analog Input Connections to J12
J12 Pin
1
2
3
Signal
AIN3
EXC
GND
Function
Analog Input 3
Excitation
Ground
Table 2-16 - Analog Input Connections to J13
J13 Pin
1
2
3
Signal
AIN4
EXC
GND
Function
Analog Input 4
Excitation
Ground
2.3.5 Mounting the Optional Solar Panel
The 5 Watt, 12 Volt Solar Panel System is to be mounted to a 2” to 2 & 3/8” pipe as illustrated in Figure 2-11. The Muffler (Pipe) Clamps are secured via four 1/4-20 bolts and lock washers.
2.3.5.1 Swivel (Directional Facing)
Solar panels used in the northern hemisphere should face due south (not magnetic south) while those used in the southern hemisphere should face due north (not magnetic north).
2.3.5.2 Tilt Angle
The Solar Panel Mounting Bracket provided by Bristol Babcock is designed to mount the
Solar panel at a fixed 45° ( ± 2 ° ) tilt angle.
TeleRTU
Figure 2-11 - Solar Panel & Mounting Hardware 2 & 3/8" Pipe Mount
J Installation /Operation/ 2-15
2.4 OPERATIONAL DETAILS
2.4.1 Changing the Local Address for a New TeleRTU
When the TeleRTU ships from the factory, it has a default local address of 127, which must be changed to match the actual address defined for the TeleRTU within NetView software.
If your particular TeleRTU has already had its local address set to some other number, and you need to change it, substitute that address when establishing a connection through
LocalView.
1. Start Open BSI ( OpenBSI Tools ). Select LocalView (see Figure 2-12).
Fig 2-12 - Starting OpenBSI and Entering Local Mode
2.
From the Local View Startup Menu, highlight Local under the Mode: field. Enter the desired name in the Name: field, e.g., TeleRTU, and then click on the Create… button
(see Figure 2-13). The Communication Setup: Step 1 Menu (Figure 2-14) should appear.
Figure 2- 13 - Local View Startup Menu (Untitled)
2-16 / Installation/Operation TeleRTU J
3.
From the Communication Setup: Step 1 Menu (Figure 2-14), change the Baud Rate to
19200 and then click on Next . The RTU Setup Menu (Figure 2-15) should appear.
Figure 2-14 - Communications Setup: Step 1 Menu
4.
On the RTU Setup: Step 2 of 3 Menu (Figure 2-15) click on No, thank you for the question, Would you like auto local address detection?
Figure 2-15 - RTU Setup: Step 2 of 3 Menu
5. Enter 127 for the question, What is the local address of the RTU that you want to connect to?
Set the RTU type to 3530 . Under Control Strategy File Name: , enter the
TeleRTU J Installation /Operation/ 2-17
name of your ACCOL Load file (not necessary if you are only changing the address). Use the Browse Button if necessary. Click on Finish . The menu of Figure 2-16 should appear.
Figure 2-16 - Titled Local View (Figure 1) Menu
6.
Click on plus sign ( + ). When the menu of Figure 2-17 appears, Click on RTU .
Figure 2-17 - Titled Local View (Figure 2) Menu
7.
Make sure that the Primary Status: indicates 0x0000 . If not, check the Comm. link configuration and make sure that the CPU’s green status LED is blinking.
8. From the menu of Figure 2-17, right click on the RTU icon. On the menu of Figure 2-18, select RTU and then Change Local Address . The Change Local Address Menu
(Figure 2-19) should appear.
2-18 / Installation/Operation TeleRTU J
Figure 2-18 - Invoking the Change Local Address Menu
9. On the Change Local Address Menu (Figure 2-19) set the desired local address via the
Select New Local Address: selector, e.g., 32 . Click on the Change button. Status should read, Status: Local address changed (see Figure 2-20).
Figure 2-19 - Change Local Address Menu - No Status:
10.
Click on the Exit button. Processing Command will appear (communications will momentarily be lost as the command is processed) followed by the titled Local View
Menu showing the new Local Address: , e.g. 32 .
The local address is now changed. In subsequent LocalView sessions, you must use the new local address when establishing communications.
TeleRTU J Installation /Operation/ 2-19
Figure 2-20 - Change Local Address Menu - Status: Local address changed
2.4.2 Downloading the Application Load
Continue from step 10 of Section 2.4.1 or follow steps 1 through 7 of Section 2.4.1 (to start
LocalView if necessary) and then follow steps 1 through 3 below to download the ACCOL
Load. You must have specified the proper ACCOL load file name in LocalView (see Figure 2-
15).
1.
From the menu of Figure 2-21, right click on the RTU icon. On the menu of Figure 2-22, select RTU and then Download . The ACCOL Download Menu (Figure 2-23) should appear.
Figure 2-21 - Titled Local View Menu with New Local Address
2-20 / Installation/Operation TeleRTU J
Figure 2-22 Invoking the ACCOL Downloader Menu
Figure 2-23 - ACCOL Download Menu
2.
Enter the Password: and then press the Begin button. Download will begin (see Figure
2-24).
TeleRTU J Installation /Operation/ 2-21
Figure 2-24 - ACCOL Download - Downloading Menu
3. Once application download has completed, the titled Local View Menu appears. Exit
Local View.
The unit is now ready for field installation.
2.4.3 Upgrading TeleRTU Firmware
If Bristol Babcock releases a new version of firmware for the TeleRTU, for example, with new features you want to use, a firmware upgrade must be performed in order to use the new version.
1.
Start Open BSI ( OpenBSI Tools ). Select LocalView (see Figure 2-12).
2.
From the Local View Startup Menu, highlight Flash under the Mode: field. Enter the desired name in the Name: field, e.g., TeleRTU, and then click on the Creat… button
(see Figure 2-25). The Communications Setup Menu (Figure 2-13) should appear.
3.
From the Communications Setup: Step 1 Menu (Figure 2-14), change the Baud Rate to 19200 and then click on Next. The Flash RTU Setup: Step 2 of 3 Menu (Figure 2-
26) should appear.
4.
On the Flash RTU Setup: Step 2 of 3 Menu (Figure 2-26), set the type of RTU to 3530 .
Enter the desired number (in this example 127 ) for the question, What is the local address of the RTU that you want to connect to? Click on the Next> button; The
Flash Data Setup: Step 3 of 3 Menu (Figure 2-27) should appear.
2-22 / Installation/Operation TeleRTU J
Figure 2-25 - Local View Startup Menu (Untitled with Flash Mode Selected)
Figure 2-26 - Flash RTU Setup: Step 2 of 3 Menu
(Untitled with Flash Mode Selected)
5. Use the Browse… button to find the Location of the Flash Master File: and then enter the name of the firmware file to be Flashed under Please, enter the name of the binary file to flash: if you know it or click on the Open… button to search for it.
Once the appropriate information has been entered into the Flash Data Setup: Step 3 of 3 Menu, click on the Finish button. The menu of Figure 2-28 should appear with download ensuing and the % of download posted as a progressing bar.
TeleRTU J Installation /Operation/ 2-23
Figure 2-27 - Flash Data Setup: Step 3 of 3 Menu
5.
Once the download has completed the menu’s download bar will show 100% and the message Sending End of File Message… will be posted instead of Downloading (see
Figure 2-29). The following Local View error message will be posted: Error on sending
End of File Record. Flash load failure.
Click on the OK button. Figure 2-30 will appear.
6.
The Local View - TeleRTUflash.LVG
Menu’s download bar will show 100 % to indicate the download has completed (see Figure 2-30).
Click on the X in the upper right corner to exit Local View.
Figure 2-28 - Local View - TeleRTUflash.LVG Menu (Download in Process)
2-24 / Installation/Operation TeleRTU J
Figure 2-29 - Local View - TeleRTUflash.LVG Menu (Sending End of File Message)
Figure 2-30 - Local View - TeleRTUflash.LVG Menu (100% - (Download Completed)
2.5
APPLICATION SOFTWARE REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
Categories of application software are discussed in Chapter 1A.
The following BBI software manuals provide the information necessary to configure and operate your system:
TeleRTU J Installation /Operation/ 2-25
D4044 ACCOL II Reference Manual - for information on ACCOL modules and statements
D4051 ACCOL Workbench User Manual - for information on creating an ACCOL source file
D5081 Open BSI Utilities Manual - for information on setting up communications between the PC and the BBI controller network
D5074 UOI Configuration Manual - for information on creating and modifying menus and logs
D5075 UOI Operator Manual - for information on how to view menus and logs
D5120 - Open BSI Harvester - for information on collecting data at regular intervals (for file export).
2.6 INSTALLATION & CONFIGURATION OF OPTIONS
For information on removal/replacement and service of the various options see Table 2-17.
Table 2-17 - Options Installation/Configuration Reference
Option
Expansion Transmitter Intf. Bd.
Section
PIP-EXPTIBTF -
Expansion Comm. Port RS-232 Bd. PIP-EXP232TF -
Expansion RS-485 and/or AO Bd.
PIP-EXP485/AO -
MDS Radio
FreeWave Radio
Appendix H
Appendix I
-
9600 bps PSTN Modem &
Modem Grounding Kit
9600 bps PSTN Modem (Current)
Isolated RS-485 Intf. Bd.
-
-
Notes see CI-9600 see PIP-3530MGKI (for units without a Ground Lug)
See CI-9600TF
See PIP-ISORS485 -
(Ext. Mounted on DIN Rail)
2-26 / Installation/Operation TeleRTU J
Section 3
SERVICE
3.1 INTRODUCTION
This section provides Removal and Replacement Procedures, and Troubleshooting/Fault
Isolation information for the TeleRTU J model 3530-15B.
Setup utilizes a PC running the ACCOL Workbench program or the Universal Operator
Interface (UOI) program. External test equipment such as a digital multimeter and oscilloscope will also be required to aid in isolating and troubleshooting certain problems.
Figure 3-1 - Local Port Communications Setup
3.2 ACCESSING PARTS FOR TESTING OR REPLACEMENT
In order to test or replace any major system component, it will be necessary to open the Instrument Front Cover. These operations should only be performed by technically qualified persons having advanced mechanical and electronic skills, and possessing the proper service equipment. Any damage to the TeleRTU J resulting from improper handling or incorrect service procedures will not be covered under the product warranty agreement. If these procedures cannot be performed properly, the unit should be returned to Bristol
Babcock for factory evaluation and repairs.
TeleRTU™ Service / 3-1
Warning
Opening the door of a powered TeleRTU that is operating in a hazardous area exposes the electrical circuitry to the atmosphere and could result in accidental fire or explosion.
Caution
PC board components can be damaged by electrostatic discharges (ESD) during disassembly, reassembly, and test procedures. Use grounded wrist straps and surface pads when working near or handling the Main Circuit Board. See attached instruction supplement
S14006 for proper grounding and handling techniques.
3.3 COMPONENT REMOVAL & REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES
The following major items are covered in this section or in an appendix:
$ Lead Acid Battery
$ CPU Board
$ On Board Fuse
$ On Board Battery
$ LCD Display/Switch Panel Assembly
$ Optional Radio (Appendix H for MDS or Appendix I for FreeWave))
$ Optional PSTN Modem (CI-9600 for 396039-02-2 or CI-9600TF for 400000-01-6)
3.3.1 Lead Acid Battery Removal/Replacement Procedure (see Figure 3-2)
1. Push the Activate Display Button on the TeleFlow's Instrument Front Cover.
2. Open the Instrument Front Cover.
3. Remove the connector P2 (Battery & Power) from J2 on the TeleRTU CPU Board. Note:
In the event the TeleRTU requires continuous operation, a small auxiliary 9V battery can be plugged into the Secondary Connector (J3).
4. If a Radio or Modem Option is installed it will have to be removed (see Section 3.3.6 for
Radio or Modem removal).
5. Remove the Radio/Modem Mounting Bracket if it was not removed in step 4. The
Radio/Modem Mounting Bracket is secured to the Battery Mounting Bracket by four screws (see Figure 3-2 - Holes Labeled B).
6. Disconnect the Red and Black wires from the battery and remove the battery.
7. To replace the battery:
Follow steps 3 through 6 in reverse order, replacing rather than removing the item in question. Close and secure the Instrument Front Cover.
3-2 / Service TeleRTU™
Figure 3-2 - TeleRTU with 12V Lead Acid Battery System
Radio/Modem Mounting Bracket Removed
3.3.2 CPU Circuit Board Removal/Replacement (see Figure 3-3)
Note:
The CPU Board is not to be removed under any circumstances unless the TeleRTU has been moved to an ESD safe area (see ESDS Manual S14006). The CPU Board should typically be removed to replace the on board Lithium Battery or Fuse F1 or to install/replace a Display/Switch Panel Assembly.
1. Open the Instrument Front Cover.
2. Disconnect power by removing harness connector plug P2 from CPU Board edge connector J2.
3. Remove all other harness from the CPU Board’s front edge connectors, i.e., P1 & P3 through P13.
4. Remove the battery (see Section 3.3.1).
5. While holding the Main Mounting Bracket, carefully remove the four (4) screws that secure the Battery Mounting Bracket and the Main Mounting Bracket to the rear wall.
Remove the battery Mounting Bracket and temporally secure the Main Mounting
Bracket to the rear wall with at least two of the screws removed in this step.
6. Remove the two screws that secure the CPU Board Shield to the CPU Board. Remove the two screws that secure the CPU Board Shield to the Main Mounting Bracket and remove the CPU Board Shield.
TeleRTU™ Service / 3-3
7. Remove the two (2) #4-40 x 5/8” Hex Standoff Posts that secure the CPU Board to the
Main Mounting Bracket. This will require the use of a 3/16” Wrench or Hex Driver.
8. Remove the remaining three (3) #4-40 x ¼” screws that secure the CPU Board to the
Main Mounting Bracket.
9. Carefully slide the CPU Board toward the front of the unit and remove harness connections from J14 (Front Panel Switch), J17 (Display Module) and J16 (Wakeup
Switch).
Note:
Exercise extreme care to avoid damage to surface mounted components.
3-4 / Service
Figure 3-3 - TeleFlow CPU Board - Front Edge View
TeleRTU™
10. Remove the Ground wire by loosening the CPU Board’s CPU Ground Screw.
11. Carefully remove the CPU Board from the TeleRTU Enclosure. Be careful not to damage the surface mounted components. Avoid contact with the Mounting Brackets,
Wiring Harnesses, etc. Note: This operation should only be performed in an ESD safe work area
12. To Replace the CPU Board:
Follow steps 2 through 11 in reverse order, replacing rather than removing the item in question.
13. Close and secure the Instrument Front Cover.
3.3.3 Removal/Replacement of the On Board Fuse F1
F1 is a 350mA (Schurter 3402.0043) fast acting fuse that is located on the CPU Board.
1. Open the Instrument Front Cover.
2. Disconnect power from the CPU Board by unplugging P1, P2 and P3 as required.
3. Remove F1 with a pair of Needle-nose Pliers or a pair of tweezers.
4. Carefully press the replacement fuse (using Tweezers or Needle-nose Pliers) into its receptacle.
5. Reconnect power to the CPU Board.
6. Close and secure the Instrument Front Cover.
3.3.4 Removal/Replacement of the On Board Battery
Note:
The On Board Battery should be changed in an ESD safe area.
The On Board Lithium Thionyl Chloride Battery provides 1AH of 3.6VDC backup power for
RAM, Real Time Clock and analog switches which are powered from the V+5B Supply.
1. Open the Instrument Front Cover.
2. To save the contents of RAM when removing the Lithium Battery leave power at J2/P2.
3. Follow step 3 through 6 of Section 3.3.2 leaving the battery connected to J2/P2.
4. Cut the holddown Tie Wrap that secures the Lithium Battery and carefully pull the three-pronged battery off the CPU Board.
5. Carefully install the replacement Lithium Battery onto the CPU Board making sure to install a new holddown Tie Wrap.
6. Disconnect the Main Battery Power Supply from J8.
TeleRTU™ Service / 3-5
7. Follow steps 3 through 6 of Section 3.3.2 in reverse order, replacing rather than removing the item in question.
8. Close and secure the Instrument Front Cover.
3.3.5 Removal/Replacement of the Display/Switch Panel Assembly
1. Open the Instrument Front Cover.
2. Disconnect power by removing harness plug P2 from CPU Board edge connector J2.
3. Remove all other harness from the CPU Board’s front edge connectors.
4. Follow steps 4 through 8 of Section 3.3.2.
5. Carefully slide the CPU Board toward the front of the unit and remove harness connections from J17 (Display Module) and J16 (Wakeup) at the rear of the board.
Note: The following connectors do not require removal from the CPU Board, J15
(TeleCounter) and J14 (Front Panel).
Note:
Exercise extreme care to avoid damage to surface mounted components.
6. Carefully remove the cable assemblies associated with the LCD Display/Switch Panel
Assembly’s switch. This will require opening the Flat Cable Mount clamp on the inside of the Instrument front Cover (door).
7. Remove the multi-color ribbon cable connector from the rear of the LCD Display Board on the inside of the Instrument Front Cover.
8. Hold (or secure with tape) the LCD Display/Switch Panel Bezel on the outside of the
Instrument Front Cover and remove the eight (8) ¼” nuts that secure the LCD
Display/Switch Panel Assembly to the Bezel and cover. Remove the LCD
Display/Switch Panel Assembly with attached Panel Switch Cable. Replace at least one of the locking nuts to temporarily secure the Bezel to the door.
9. The LCD Display/Switch Panel Assembly can be disassembled if it is desired to replace either the Membrane Switch Panel or LCD Display Sub-assembly. The LCD Display
Sub-assembly is secured to the Membrane Switch Panel via four screws (with washers).
10.
To replace the LCD Display/Switch Panel assembly:
While securing the Bezel on the outside of the Instrument Front Cover (door), install the LCD Display/Switch Panel Assembly on the inside of the door via eight (8) self locking ¼” nuts.
Plug the multi-color ribbon cable connector into its mating Display Module connector on the top of the LCD Display Board (on the inside of the door). Note: The yellow wire should be on the right side when installed.
Additionally the cable’s connector must be centered on its mating board connector. Position the multi-colored Display Module
Cable so that it is aligned with the Flat Cable Mount (clamp) on the inside of the door.
3-6 / Service TeleRTU™
Figure 3-4 - Inside View of TeleRTU J
- Carefully position and route the Switch Panel Cable so that it runs above the Display
Module Cable and along with the Display Module cable is aligned with the Flat
Cable Mount on the inside of the door.
- Close the Flat Cable Mount on the inside of the door.
- Install the Display Module cable connector into connector J17 on the CPU Board.
Note: The cable’s yellow conductor should be adjacent to J17 pin 1.
TeleRTU™ Service / 3-7
- Install the Wakeup cable connector to J16. Note: This cable can be plugged in either way, i.e., it is not polarity sensitive.
11. To Replace the CPU Board:
Follow steps 2 through 5 in reverse order, replacing rather than removing the item in question.
12. Close and secure the Instrument Front Cover.
3.3.6
Removal/Replacement of Modem or Radio Options
Removal/Replacement of the 9600 bps Modem Option is covered in BBI Customer
Instruction Manuals as follows: Modem P/N 396039-02-2 (see CI-9600)
Modem P/N 400000-01-6 (see CI-9600TF)
Removal/Replacement of the MDS Radio Option is covered in Appendix H. Removal/-
Replacement of the FreeWave Radio Option is covered in Appendix I.
3.3.7
Removal/Replacement of the Expansion TIB Option
Removal/Replacement of the Expansion Transmitter Interface Board Option is covered in
BBI Product Information Package PIP-EXPTIBTF.
3.3.8
Removal/Replacement of the Expansion RS-232 Intf. Bd. Option
Removal/Replacement of the Expansion RS-232 Interface Board Option is covered in BBI
Product Information Package PIP-EXP232TF.
3.3.9
Removal/Replacement of the Exp. RS-485 and/or AO Bd. Option
Removal/Replacement of the Expansion RS-485 and/or Analog Output Board Option is covered in BBI Product Information Package PIP-EXP485/AO.
3.4 TROUBLESHOOTING TIPS
3.4.1 Battery & Fuse F1 Checks (Processor not running or no power
)
Check the output of the PWR1, PWR2 , AUX PWR (and Solar Power - PWR if present) circuits at the card edge connector.
The CPU Board requires a Supply Voltage of 10.8 to 16 (VDC) for normal operation. PWR1
(J2-1 & J2-2) and PWR2 (J3-1 & J3-2) share a single 350mA Fuse. Auxiliary Power (J4-1
& J4-2) and Solar Power (J1-1 & J1-2) are not fused.
$ If Power is below 12 VDC at PWR1 or PWR2 (or SPWR) check the battery (and solar panel if present).
$ If no voltage is present at the PWR1 or PWR2 terminals check Fuse F1 on the CPU
Board.
3-8 / Service TeleRTU™
PIN #
J4-1
J4-2
J3-1
J3-2
J2-1
J2-2
J1-1
J1-2
Table 3-3 - Power Plugs J1, J2, J3 & J4
PIN
NAME
CONNECTION PURPOSE
AUX PWR +5 to +16 (VDC) Auxiliary Power Output
GND Ground/Return Auxiliary Power Output
PWR 2
GND
PWR 1
GND
PWR
GND
Battery +
Battery -
Battery +_
Battery -
Solar Panel +
Solar Panel -
Secondary Power Input
Secondary Power Input
Primary Power Input
Primary Power Input
Solar Power Input
Solar Power Input
3.4.2 LED Checks:
The CPU Board contains two LEDs (D27 is green & D26 is red). These LEDs are situated between the LCD Contrast Adjuster (R18) and the AUX POWER connector (J4) on the card edge. These LEDs function as follows:
D27 - Green: This LED indicates the TeleRTU J operating mode.
Flash 5/Sec. = Communications or Calculation Mode.
Short Flash 1/Sec. = Sleep Mode.
D26 - Red:When flashing, this LED indicates a FLASH PROM download is in progress.
$ If these LEDs are inoperable, check the voltage at PWR1. Check Fuse F1.
3.4.3 LCD Display Checks
On initial system startup, the LCD will indicate that a warm or cold start is in progress.
In the case of a cold start (for new units received from the factory), the LCD Display will prompt the user as follows:
AWAITING ACCOL DOWNLOAD
The user must download an ACCOL load to continue.
The display will then scroll through its list twice. Verify that the LCD displays the following messages:
1. Date & Time
2. Local I.D. & Group I.D.
3. Network Comm. Active (Note: This message will appear intermittently when the
Carrier Detect RS-232 signal on the Network Serial Port is active.)
4.
TeleFlow Version X.X
$ If the LCD Display is difficult to read, check its Contrast Adjustment on the CPU
Board. This Adjusting Pot. (R18) is situated between the Secondary Power Connector
(J3) and the Green LED (D27).
TeleRTU™ Service / 3-9
$ If the LCD Display is inoperative or erratic check the cable connection at the CPU
Board and the Display Board.
$ If after checking the cable connections, the LCD Display is still inoperative replace the
LCD Display Module and cables with known good hardware. If the LCD Display is still inoperative, the most likely cause is a defective CPU Board.
3.4.4 Field Wiring/Signal Checks
Check Input or Output Field Wires at the Card Edge Connector and at the field device.
Check wiring for continuity, shorts & opens. Check the I/O signals at the Card Edge
Connectors (see Table 3-4).
Table 3-4 - Standard Field I/O Wiring List
PIN# Signal
J5-1 DIN 0
J5-2 GND
J5-3 DOUT 0
J6-1 DIN 1
Function
Discrete Input 0
Ground
Discrete Output 0
Discrete Input 1
Notes
See Section 2.4.1
See Section 2.4.1 & 2.4.2
See Section 2.4.2
See Section 2.4.1
J6-2 GND
J6-3 DOUT 1
J7-1 GND
J7-2 LTXD
Ground
Discrete Output 1
Ground
Transmit Data Output
See Section 2.4.1 & 2.4.2
See Section 2.4.2
See Section 2.4.5.2
See Section 2.4.5.2
J7-3 LRXD Receive Data Input
J7-4 WAKEUP Wakeup Signal
J8-1 GND
J8-2 RDCD
Ground
See Section 2.4.5.2
See Section 2.4.5.2 & 2.4.5.3
See Section 2.4.5.3
Data Carrier Detect Input See Section 2.4.5.3
J8-3 RDTR
J8-4 RCTS
J8-5 RRTS
J8-6 RRXD
J8-7 RTXD
Data Term Ready Output See Section 2.4.5.3
Clear To Send Input See Section 2.4.5.3
Request To Send Output
Receive Data Input
Transmit Data Output
See Section 2.4.5.3
See Section 2.4.5.3
See Section 2.4.5.3
J9-1 GND
J9-2 PULSE 1
J9-3 GND-
J9-4 PULSE 2
J10-1 AIN1
J10-2 EXC
J10-3 GND
J11-1 AIN2
J11-2 EXC
J11-3 GND
J12-1 AIN3
J12-2 EXC
J12-3 GND
J13-1 AIN4
J13-2 EXC
J13-3 GND
Ground
Pulse Input 1
Ground
Pulse Input 2
Analog Input 1
Excitation
Ground
Analog Input 2
Excitation
Ground
Analog Input 3
Excitation
Ground
Analog Input 4
Excitation
Ground
See Section 2.4.3
See Section 2.4.3
See Section 2.4.3
See Section 2.4.3
See Section 2.4.4
See Section 2.4.4
See Section 2.4.4
See Section 2.4.4
See Section 2.4.4
See Section 2.4.4
See Section 2.4.4
See Section 2.4.4
See Section 2.4.4
See Section 2.4.4
See Section 2.4.4
See Section 2.4.4
3-10 / Service TeleRTU™
Section 4
SPECIFICATIONS
4.1 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
Temperature:
Relative Humidity:
Vibration Effect:
Transient Susceptibility:
ESD Susceptibility:
EMI Susceptibility:
EMI Radiation:
Operating Range: -40 to +60°C (-40 to 140°F)
5% to 90% (noncondensing)
< ±0.1% FS for 10-500 Hz at 1 g on any axis per
SAMA PMC 33.1-1978.
Meets the requirements of ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1-
1989 (formerly IEEE 472) for surge withstand capability.
Meets the requirements of IEC 801-2 for ESD withstand capability up to 10KV (No Damage).
Meets the requirements of IEC 801-3 level 3
(10V/M) from 500kHz to 500MHz. Effect on pressure and temperature readings is < "0.25% FS.
Computational, archival, communications, and control functions are not impaired.
Meets FCC Rules Part J, Subpart 15, Class A for radiated emissions.
Hazardous Locations: Nonincendive for use in Class I, Division 2, Groups
C & D hazardous locations (see Appendix A).
4.2 CPU, MEMORY & PROGRAM INTERFACE
Processor:
Memory:
RAM Battery Backup:
80C188EB, 16-bit microprocessor operating at
8MHz.
- 256K bytes Flash PROM.
- 512K bytes of Battery Backed Static RAM.
Lithium battery (3.6 V) with 5000 hours cumulative backup.
4.3 COMMUNICATIONS
Communication Ports:
Signal:
Two asynchronous ports standard
RS-232 Levels
TeleRTU™ Specifications / 4-1
Local Port:
Network Port:
Communication Rates:
Protocol:
For configuration, data collection, etc.
For Radio or Modem or RS-485 network
Selectable from 1200 bps to 19.2 Kbps
Bristol Standard Asynchronous Protocol (BSAP) compatible with International Standard, ISO 1745,
2111 & 2629. Interface compatible for use with
Radio Modems or Phone-line Modems (Private Line or Switched Network types).
4.4 DISCRETE INPUTS
No. of Inputs:
Input Voltage Range:
Input Threshold:
2 DIs
0 to 16 Vdc
High = 3.6V (Min)
Low = 0.98V (Max)
Pullup Voltage:
Input Leakage:
4.8V (Nominal) at terminal (with input open)
15uA (Max)
Sink Current (to pull input low): 100uA (Min)
Allowable Source Leakage: 7uA (Max)
4.5 DISCRETE OUTPUTS
No. of Outputs:
Switched Voltage Range:
Load:
Off-state Leakage:
2 DOs
0 to 16 Vdc (Transorb Clamped)
100 mA Max.
8uA (Typical), 100uA (Max)
On-state Resistance (to ground): 0.29 Ohms (Typical), 0.50 Ohms (Max)
4.6 PULSE INPUTS
No of Inputs:
Voltage Range:
Minimum Frequency:
2 PIs
0 to 16V
DC
4-2 / Specifications TeleRTU™
Maximum Frequency:
(0-5V Square Wave)
Minimum Pulse Width:
Input Threshold (Low)
Input Threshold (High)
Accumulator Capacity:
4.7 ANALOG INPUTS
No of Inputs:
Input Range
Resolution
Accuracy (Calibrated):
4.8 POWER
Operating Voltage
Ripple Voltage Tolerance
(# 60Hz)
Operating Current
Noise Voltage Tolerance
Connector Type
(J2 & J3)
Wire Size
Fuse Type & Rating
9kHz (Max.) (Low Impedance Source)
200 Hz (Open Collector or Dry Contact)
100uS
1.95V (Typical), 1.50V (Minimum)
2.95V (Typical), 3.50V (Maximum)
65535 pulses
4 AIs
1 to 5 Vdc
±15 bits, 186 m V nominally
±0.03%
Min. = +10.8Vdc (Max. = +16Vdc)
Max. = 100mVpp
Typ. = 81mA Communication Mode
(Max. = 100mA)
Typ. = 63mA Calculation Mode
(Max. = 75mA)
Typ. = 0.9mA Sleep Mode
(Max. = 1.6mA)
Max. = 100mVpp
Pluggable Weidmuller
Max. = 14AWG
350mA (Schurter 3402.0043)
TeleRTU™ Specifications / 4-3
4.9 AUXILIARY POWER
Output Voltage
Max. Load Current
On Resistance
Leakage:
4.10 BACKUP BATTERY
Type
Capacity
Voltage
Discharge Current (Backup)
Equals [Vin - (Iload) x Ron)] where:
Vin = Power at the PWR1 Connector
Iload = Load Current
Ron = On Resistance
1.8A Continuous (2.5A Momentary)
Typ. = 0.37 Ohms (Max. = 0.5 Ohms)
Typ. = 22 m A (Max. = 100 m A)
Tadiran TL-5134 (Lithium Thionyl Chloride)
1 Ah
3.6Vdc (Nominal)
Max. = 60uA
4-4 / Specifications TeleRTU™
TeleRTU
Special Instructions for Class I, Division 2 Hazardous Locations
1. A version of the TeleRTU is available which is listed by Underwriters Laboratories (UL) as nonincendive for use in Class I, Division 2, Group C and D hazardous and non-hazardous locations.
Read this document carefully before installing a nonincendive TeleRTU. Refer to the TeleRTU User's
Manual for general information. In the event of a conflict between the TeleRTU User's Manual and this document, always follow the instructions in this document.
2. The TeleRTU includes both nonincendive and unrated field circuits. Unless a circuit is specifically identified in this document as nonincendive, the circuit is unrated. Unrated circuits must be wired using Division 2 wiring methods as specified in article 501-4(b) of the National Electrical Code (NEC),
NFPA 70 for installations within the United States, or as specified in Section 18-152 of the Canadian
Electrical Code for installation in Canada.
3. The local communications port terminates in a circular connector on the bottom of the TeleRTU enclosure. The wiring on this connector is unrated. No connections may be made to this port unless the user ensures that the area is known to be nonhazardous. Connections to this port are temporary, and must be short in duration to ensure that flammable concentrations do not accumulate while it is in use.
4. An optional power system (solar panel and battery pack) is approved for use with the nonincendive
TeleRTU as described in the Model Specification. The connection to this solar panel is approved as a nonincendive circuit, so that Division 2 wiring methods is not required. The nominal panel voltage must match the nominal battery voltage (12V).
5.
WARNING: EXPLOSION HAZARD - Do Not disconnect the Solar PWR, PWR1, PWR2 or AUXPWR terminals unless the area is known to be nonhazardous.
6.
WARNING: EXPLOSION HAZARD Substitution of components may impair suitability for use in
Class I, Division 2 environments.
7.
WARNING: EXPLOSION HAZARD - The area must be known to be nonhazardous before servicing/replacing the unit and before installing or removing I/O wiring.
8.
WARNING: EXPLOSION HAZARD - Do Not disconnect equipment unless power has been disconnected and the area is known to be nonhazardous.
9. The signals available for customer wiring are available in Table A1.
10. The UL listed nonincendive TeleRTU includes radio communications (MDS Model 2310, 4310, 4710,
9710 or 9810) or (FreeWave Spread Spectrum Radio) which is used in conjunction with a 5W, 12V
Solar Panel System. Installation of a BBI modem in the TeleRTU housing is approved. Connection to the radio or modem is approved as a nonincendive circuit, so that Division 2 wiring methods are not required.
Table A1 - CPU Board Customer Wiring Signal Names
Signal Name
SOLAR
PWR
PWR 1 & 2
AUX
POWER
DIN 0 & 1
DOUT 0 & 1
Signal Description
Solar Panel inputs; 5W, 12V. Refer to ¶ 4 of this document.
Power supply inputs; maximum 16VDC. Refer to ¶ 5 of this document.
Power output to Radio or Modem; maximum 16VDC. Refer to ¶ 5 of this document.
Discrete inputs; maximum 16VDC. Use Division 2 wiring methods.
Discrete outputs; maximum 16VDC, 100mA. Use Division 2 wiring methods.
11/21/2000 Appendix A, Document CI3530-15B Page 1 of 2
TeleRTU
Special Instructions for Class I, Division 2 Hazardous Locations
LRXD, LTXD,
& WAKEUP
RDCD, RDTR,
RCTS, RRTS,
RRXD, RTXD
Pulse 1 & 2
AI EXC &
AIN1 - 4
Local communications port; factory wired, maximum input or output is ±16VDC.
Refer to ¶ 3 of this document. Note: When WAKEUP is used with an optional radio refer to ¶ 10 of this document.
Remote communications port (for radio or modem). Refer to 3530-15B Model
Spec. and ¶ 10 of this document.
Pulse inputs; maximum 16VDC. Use Division 2 wiring methods.
Analog inputs and excitations; maximum 16VDC. Use Division 2 wiring methods.
Note: When AIN1//2/3 or 4 is used with an optional radio refer to ¶ 10 of this document.
11/21/2000 Appendix A, Document CI3530-15B Page 2 of 2
Instruction Manual
CI-3530-15B
May, 2006
TeleRTU Model 3530-15B
RADIO INSTALLATION GUIDE for MDS
Model 4710A/B, 9710A/B & 9810 Radios
Appendix H
www.EmersonProcess.com/Bristol
BLANK PAGE
Appendix H
RADIO INSTALLATION GUIDE
For MDS Model 4710A/B, 9710A/B & 9810 Radios
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION TITLE
1.2 LEDs ................................................................................................................................... 1
Section 2 - INSTALLATION & SERVICE
2.2 WIRING LISTS.................................................................................................................... 4
3.1
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS............................................................................................ 5
3.1.1
3.1.2
3.1.3
Model 4710 General Specs ................................................................................................ 5
Model 9710 General Specs. ............................................................................................... 5
Model 9810 General Specs. ............................................................................................... 5
3.2 TRANSMITTER
3.2.1
Model 4710 Transmitter Specs. .......................................................................................... 6
3.2.2
Model 9710 Transmitter Specs. .......................................................................................... 6
3.2.3
3.3
3.3.1
3.3.2
3.3.3
3.4
3.5
Model 9810 Transmitter Specs. .......................................................................................... 7
RECEIVER SPECIFICATIONS........................................................................................... 7
Model 4710 Receiver Specs. .............................................................................................. 7
Model 9710 Receiver Specs. .............................................................................................. 7
Model 9810 Receiver Specs. .............................................................................................. 8
ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS .............................................................................. 8
MDS Models 4710, 9710 & 9810 ........................................................................................ 8
REFERENCED OEM MANUALS
MDS 4710A – Remote Data Transceiver (Radio)
MDS 4710/9710 Series 400MHz/900 MHz Remote Data Transceiver Installation and Operation Guide –
MDS Doc. 05-3305A01, Rev. B, Sept. 2000 (PDF = 3305B-710AC.pdf) for model MDS 4710A
MDS 4710B – Data Transceiver (Radio)
MDS 4710B/9710B Data Transceiver Installation and Operation Guide – MDS Doc. 05-3316A01, Rev. E,
Sept. 2000 (PDF = 3316E-x710B.pdf) for model MDS 4710B
MDS 9810 – Spread Spectrum Data Transceiver (Radio)
MDS 9810/24810 900 MHz/2.4GHz Spread Spectrum Transceivers Installation and Operation Guide –
MDS Doc. 05-3301A01, Rev. B, April 2000 (PDF = 3301B-x810.pdf) for model MDS 9810
MDS 9710A Remote Data Transceiver (Radio)
MDS 4710/9710 Series 400MHz/900 MHz Remote Data Transceiver – MDS Doc. 05-3305A01,
Rev. B, Sept. 2000 (Installation & Operation) (PDF = 3305B-710AC.pdf) for model MDS 9710A
CI-3530-15B Appendix H Page 0-1 Table Of Contents
Appendix H
RADIO INSTALLATION GUIDE
For MDS Model 4710A/B, 9710A/B & 9810 Radios
TABLE OF CONTENTS
REFERENCED OEM MANUALS (Continued)
MDS 9710B Data Transceiver (Radio)
MDS 4710B/9710B Data Transceiver Installation and Operation Guide – MDS Doc. 05-3316A01, Rev. E,
Sept. 2000 (PDF = 3316E-x710B.pdf) for model MDS 9710B
CI-3530-15B Appendix H Page 0-2 Table Of Contents
Appendix H
RADIO INSTALLATION GUIDE for MDS Model 4710A/B, 9710A/B & 9810 Radios
Section 1 - INTRODUCTION
1.1 GENERAL INTRODUCTION
Each TeleRTU may be ordered with an MDS Radio Installed, i.e., "Radio Equipped," or as a "Radio
Ready" unit. Radio Ready units contain all hardware required to field install a Bristol provided MDS Radio except the radio, antenna and external antenna cable. Radio Ready units can be ordered with or without an optional Polyphaser (Lightning/Impulse Suppresser) (see Figures 1, 2 & 3).
Each Bristol supplied MDS Data Transceiver (Radio) Option mounts inside the TeleRTU Enclosure and is secured to the Radio/Modem Mounting Bracket via four screws. The Radio/Modem Mounting Bracket is secured to the Battery Mounting Bracket via four screws.
TeleRTUs equipped with the MDS Radio Option utilize the following additional hardware:
1.
MDS Radio Transceiver (Choice of five models):
Model 4710A/B (9600 Baud/330-512 MHz)
Model 9710A/B (9600 Baud/800-960 MHz)
Model 9810 (900MHz - Spread Spectrum)
2.
Radio/Modem Mounting Bracket (secured to rear of MDS radio via four (4) screws - ‘C’)
Radio/Modem Mounting Bracket (secured to Battery Mounting Bracket via four (4) screws ‘B’)
(see Figure 1)
3.
Radio/TeleRTU Interface Cable (392733-01-3) - 25-Pin D-Type Plug P1 connects to Radio and 7 open-ended wires connect to CPU Bd. Connectors P8 & P10 (see Table 2)
4.
2-Wire Radio Power Cable (395445-02-7) - Connects to the Radio Power Connector and P4 of
TeleRTU) (see Table 1).
5.
Internal Coaxial Antenna Cable or Polyphaser and Polyphaser Cable
6.
12V Battery Mounting Bracket (for Radio Option) with 12V Battery
1.2 LEDs
MDS Radio model 9810 is supplied with six (6) LEDs that function as follows:
TR - Terminal Ready RTS (Request To Send) has been received by the internal modem from the TeleRTU.
MR - Modem Ready CTS (Clear To Send) time has elapsed and the radio is ready to transmit data from the TeleRTU.
CD - Carrier Detect The radio senses a RF signal from the master station.
TD - Transmit Data Reflects the current state of the Transmit Data (TXD) line from the
TeleRTU. LED ON = 0 Bit, LED OFF = 1 Bit.
IN - Radio Inhibited/Disabled A ground on Pin 12 of the INTERFACE connector disables all radio functions. This LED is dimly lit when Pin 12 of the INTERFACE connector is grounded and power is applied to the radio.
RD - Receive Data Reflects the current state of the Receive Data line from the transceiver's internal modem. LED ON = 0 Bit, LED OFF = 1 Bit.
MDS Radios models 4710 & 9710 are supplied with four (4) LEDs that function as follows:
CI-3530-15B Appendix H – MDS 4710A/B, 9710A/B & 9810 Radio Installation Guide Page 1
Rapid Flash - (Five times/second) = Fault Indication.
Off = No power applied to radio or radio is in sleep mode.
Continuous = Radio is receiving a data signal from a continuously keyed radio.
TXD - Transmit Data A mark signal is being received at the Data Interface.
RXD - Receive Data A mark signal is being sent out from the Data Interface.
Page 2
Figure 1 - TeleRTU with Radio Option
Appendix H – MDS 4710A/B, 9710A/B & 9810 Radio Installation Guide CI-3530-15B
Section 2 - INSTALLATION & SERVICE
2.1 RADIO REMOVAL/REPLACEMENT & INSTALLATION
DANGER
The MDS Radio models 4710A/B, 9710A/B & 9810 provided by Bristol Inc. are approved for use in Class I, Groups C & D, Division 2, Hazardous Locations. The installer must be familiar with hazardous location installation guidelines before installation or maintenance is undertaken. Do not begin radio installation or service to the TeleRTU unless the area is known to be non-hazardous. Refer to the appropriate appendix of the
MDS Installation, Operation & Field Maintenance Manual applicable to the radio in question, for approved conditions under which the MDS radio can be installed in hazardous locations.
AVOID OPERATING EQUIPMENT DURING AN ELECTRICAL STORM. THE IMPULSE SUP-
PRESSOR MAY SAVE EQUIPMENT FROM DANGER, BUT SHOULD NOT BE CONSIDERED
AS BEING SAFE FOR PERSONNEL.
Figure 2 - Bottom View of MDS Radio Option
2.1.1 Radio Removal/Replacement Procedure
To remove the Radio Transceiver follow steps 1 through 6 below. To replace the Radio Transceiver follow steps 2 through 6 below in reverse order, installing rather than removing the item in question and then perform step 6.
1. Loosen the three (3) captive quarter-turn fasteners (and remove the lock if present) which secure the
Instrument Front Cover. Open the Instrument Front Cover.
2.
Disconnect power from the radio by removing the two-wire power plug from the bottom of the radio.
CI-3530-15B Appendix H – MDS 4710A/B, 9710A/B & 9810 Radio Installation Guide Page 3
3.
Disconnect the Radio/TeleFlow Interface Cable (392733-01-3) from the bottom of the Radio.
4.
Unscrew the Antenna Lead from the bottom of the radio.
5.
Unscrew the four (4) screws that secure the radio (via the Radio/Modem Mounting Bracket) to the
Battery Mounting Bracket (Location B Figure 1).
6. Remove the MDS radio
7. Close and secure the Door.
2.2 WIRING LISTS
Radio Power Cable (395445-02-7)
RADIO
Pwr. Conn.
COLOR
TeleFlow CPU
SIGNAL
+ RED 1
- BLK 2
16.5 V Max
13.8 V Typ.
GND
Table 1 - Radio Power Cable (395445-02-7) Wire List
Radio/TeleFlow Interface Cable (392733-01-3)
CPU Pin # CPU Board
Sig. Name
Radio D-Conn. #
& Wire Color
Radio D-Conn.
Signal Name
J8-1 GND 7 GND
J8-2 RDCD 8 (Green) DCD (Out)
J8-4
J8-5
J8-6
J8-7
RCTS
RRTS
RRXD
RTXD
5 (Brown)
4 (Blue)
3 (White)
2 (Red)
CTS (Out)
RTS (In)
RXD (Out)
TXD (In)
J10-1 AIN1 21
Function
Ground
Data Carrier Detect Input
Clear To Send Input
Request To Send Output
Receive Data Input
Transmit Data Output
Receive Signal Strength
Indicator/Analog Input
Table 2 - TeleFlow/Radio Interface Cable (392733-01-3) Wire List
Page 4
Figure 3 - Radio/TeleFlow Interface Cable 392733-01-3
Appendix H – MDS 4710A/B, 9710A/B & 9810 Radio Installation Guide CI-3530-15B
Note:
The red RSSI conductor (Receive Strength Signal Indicator) can be used to monitor the receiver's signal strength when a volt meter is placed across
RRSI (Orange) and Ground (CPU Connector J8-1).
Section 3 - SPECIFICATIONS
3.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
3.1.1 Model 4710 General Specs.
Frequency Band:
Frequency Increments:
Frequency Stability:
380-512 MHz
6.25 kHz or 5 kHz (factory configurable)
1.5 PPM, -30
°
C to +60
°
C,
(-22
°
F to +140
°
F)
Primary Power:
Voltage: 13.8 Vdc nominal
(10.5 - 16 Vdc Operating Range)
1.8 A nominal, 2.5 A maximum TX Supply Current:
RX Supply Current:
Reverse Polarity Protection:
3.1.2 Model 9710 General Specs.
Frequency Band:
Frequency Increments:
Frequency Stability:
150 mA (< 16 mA in Sleep Mode)
Diode across primary input
800-960 MHz
6.25 kHz or 5 kHz (factory configurable)
1.5 PPM, -30
°
C to +60
°
C,
(-22
°
F to +140
°
F)
Primary Power:
Voltage:
TX Supply Current:
RX Supply Current:
Reverse Polarity Protection:
3.1.3 Model 9810 General Specs.
Frequency Band:
Frequency Hopping Range:
13.8 Vdc nominal
(10.5- 16 Vdc Operating Range)
1.8 A nominal, 2.5 A maximum
150 mA (< 16 mA in Sleep Mode)
Diode across primary input
902-928 MHz part 15 Spread Spectrum Band
8 selectable zones each containing 128 frequencies for a total of 1019 frequencies
Frequency Stability:
±
0.00015% (1.5 PPM), -30
°
C to +60
°
C,
(-22
°
F to +140
°
F) For all Models
CI-3530-15B Appendix H – MDS 4710A/B, 9710A/B & 9810 Radio Installation Guide Page 5
Primary Power:
Voltage:
TX Supply Current:
RX Supply Current:
Standby Current (Sleep Mode):
Reverse Polarity Protection:
3.2 TRANSMITTER SPECIFICATIONS
3.2.1 Model 4710 Transmitter Specs.
Frequency Range:
13.8 Vdc nominal
(10.5- 26.0 Vdc Operating Range)
<400 mA
<125 mA
<30 mA
Diode across primary input
Power Output:
Duty Cycle:
Output Impedance:
Frequency Stability:
RF Channel Bandwidth:
Spurious & Harmonic Emissions:
Response Time:
Time-out Timer:
3.2.2 Model 9710 Transmitter Specs.
Frequency Range:
Power Output:
Duty Cycle:
Output Impedance:
Frequency Stability:
RF Channel Bandwidth:
380-512 MHz, Programmable in 6.25 kHz or 5 kHz increments (factory configurable) to any channel pair in radio operating sub-band.
5 Watts/+37 dBm (maximum) at the Antenna
Connector
Continuous
50 Ohms
1.5 PPM, -30
°
C to +60
°
C,
(-22
°
F to +140
°
F)
12.5 kHz
-65 dBc
5 ms
Internal; programmable from 1-255 seconds in
1-second increments
800-960 MHz, Programmable in 6.25 kHz or 5 kHz increments (factory configurable) to any channel pair in radio operating sub-band.
5 Watts/+37 dBm (maximum) at the Antenna
Connector
Continuous
50 Ohms
1.5 PPM, -30
°
C to +60
°
C,
(-22
°
F to +140
°
F)
12.5 kHz
Page 6 Appendix H – MDS 4710A/B, 9710A/B & 9810 Radio Installation Guide CI-3530-15B
Spurious & Harmonic Emissions:
Response Time:
Time-out Timer:
3.2.3 Model 9810 Transmitter Specs.
Frequency Band:
Power Output:
Duty Cycle:
Output Impedance:
Frequency Stability:
Spurious Emissions:
Harmonic Emissions:
Transmitter Keying:
3.3 RECEIVER SPECIFICATIONS
3.3.1 Model 4710 Receiver Specs.
Frequency Range:
Frequency Stability:
Intermodulation:
IF Selectivity:
Desensitization:
Spurious and Image Rejection:
RF Channel Bandwidth:
Sensitivity:
Squelch Opening Time:
CI-3530-15B
-65 dBc
5 ms
Internal; programmable from 1-255 seconds in
1-second increments
902-928 MHz Part 15 Spread Spectrum Band
.1 to 1 Watt (20-30 dBm ± 1dB)
Continuous
50 Ohms
±
0.00015% (1.5 PPM), -30
°
C to +60
°
C,
(-22
°
F to +140
°
F) For all Models
-60 dBc
-80 dBc
Data activated
380-512 MHz Programmable in 6.25 kHz increments to any channel pair in radio operating sub-band.
1.5 PPM, -30
°
C to +60
°
C,
(-22
°
F to +140
°
F)
75 dB minimum (EIA)
65 dB minimum at adjacent Channel
65 dB minimum on 12.5 kHz Channel
85 dB minimum
12.5 kHz
12 dB SINAD at -110 dBm
2 ms
Appendix H – MDS 4710A/B, 9710A/B & 9810 Radio Installation Guide Page 7
3.3.2 Model 9710 Receiver Specs.
Frequency Range: 800-960 MHz Programmable in 6.25 kHz increments to any channel pair in radio operating sub-band.
Frequency Stability:
Conversion Superheterodyne
1.5 PPM, -30
°
C to +60
°
C,
(-22
°
F to +140
°
F)
Intermodulation: 75 dB minimum (EIA)
IF Selectivity:
Desensitization:
Spurious and Image Rejection:
RF Channel Bandwidth:
Sensitivity:
Squelch Opening Time:
65 dB minimum at adjacent Channel
65 dB minimum on 12.5 kHz Channel
85 dB minimum
12.5 kHz
12 dB SINAD at -110 dBm
2 ms
3.3.3 Model 9810 Receiver Specs.
Frequency Band: 902-928 MHz Part 15 Spread Spectrum Band.
Frequency Stability:
Intermodulation:
Desensitization:
Spurious and Image Rejection:
Bit Error Rate:
3.4 ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS
3.4.1 MDS Models 4710, 9710 & 9810
Temperature Range:
Humidity:
±0.00015% (1.5 PPM), -30
°
C to +60
°
C,
(-22
°
F to +140
°
F) For all Models
75 dB minimum (EIA)
65 dB minimum (EIA) on 12.5 kHz Channels
70 dB minimum
Less than 10
-6
at -110 dBm
Full Performance -30
°
C to +60
°
C,
(-22
°
F to +140
°
F)
95% at +40
°
C (104
°
F)
Page 8 Appendix H – MDS 4710A/B, 9710A/B & 9810 Radio Installation Guide CI-3530-15B
Appendix I
FreeWave RADIO OPTION
For Instruction Manuals
CI-3530-15B
Issue: 04/2002
FREE
W AVE
Model Number: DGRO9RFS
RS232
6V
Serial Number: XXX-XXXX
FCC ID: KNY-205-108213
Canada: 2329 102 336A
FreeWavw Technologies, Inc.
Boulder, CO 80301. This device complies with
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2) this device must accept any interference received, including interferences that may cause undesired operation.
1
Bristol Babcock
Appendix I
FreeWave RADIO OPTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION TITLE
1.1
1.2
2.1
2.1.1
2.1.2
2.2
2.3
PAGE #
GENERAL INTRODUCTION .......................................................................................... 1
LEDs................................................................................................................................... 1
Section 2 - INSTALLATION & SERVICE
RADIO REMOVAL/REPLACEMENT & INSTALLATION ............................................ 4
Radio Removal/Replacement Procedure .......................................................................... 4
Radio Installation Procedure ............................................................................................ 5
WIRING LISTS.................................................................................................................. 9
ADDITIONAL FreeWave INFORMATION ..................................................................... 9
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS ...................................................................................... 10
TRANSMITTER SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................. 10
RECEIVER SPECIFICATIONS ..................................................................................... 10
ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS....................................................................... 11
Reference Document
FreeWave Spread Spectrum Wireless Data Transceiver User Manual
FreeWave Technologies, Inc.
1880 South Flatiron Court
Boulder, CO 80301
CI-3530-15B Appendix I Page 0-1 Table Of Contents
Section 1
INTRODUCTION
1.1 GENERAL INTRODUCTION
The TeleRTU J may be ordered with a FreeWave Radio installed, i.e., "Radio Equipped," or the FreeWave Radio may be “ field installed." TeleFlow units contain all hardware required to field install a BBI provided FreeWave Radio except the radio (with Radio/Mounting
Plate), signal cable, four (4) 4-40 x 1/4 pan head screws, the antenna and the external antenna cable. The FreeWave Radio option can be used with or without an optional
Polyphaser (Lightning/Impulse Suppresser) (see Figures 1 through 6).
The BBI supplied FreeWave Radio is mounted to the Radio Mounting Plate via four (4) 4-
40 UNC-2A x 1/4 Pan Head Screws. The Radio Mounting Plate (with Radio Option) mounts inside the TeleFlow J Enclosure and is secured to the Radio/Modem Mounting Plate
(Battery Cover) via (4) 4-40 x 1/4 pan head screws. The Radio/Modem Mounting Plate is secured to the Battery Mounting Bracket by four screws.
TeleRTUs equipped with the FreeWave Radio Option utilize the following additional hardware:
1. FreeWave Wireless Data Transceiver
2. Radio Mounting Plate (secured to rear of the radio via four (4) screws) - Secures Radio to Radio/Modem Mounting Plate (Battery Cover) via four (4) screws (see Figures 2 & 3).
Mounting holes for Radio to Radio Mounting Plate are indicated by four (4) ‘ Cs.
’
Mounting holes for Radio Mounting Plate to Radio/Modem Mounting Plate (Battery
Cover) are indicated by four (4) ‘ Bs.
’
3. Radio/TeleRTU Interface Cable (396369-01-4) - 10-Pin Jack Connector (MTA-100) connects to the radio while the and eight (8) open-ended wires (see Table 4) are connected to CPU Board Connectors J4/P4 (Power) and J8/P8 (Network).
4.
Internal Coaxial Antenna Cable or Polyphaser and Polyphaser Cable.
5.
Four (4) 4-40 x 1/4 pan head screws - secures radio to Radio Mounting Plate.
6.
Four (4) No. 4 washers (Internal Tooth Lock) - used with item 5 above.
.
7.
Four (4) 4-40 x 1/4 pan head screws - secures Radio Mounting Plate to Radio/Modem
Mounting Plate (Battery Cover) (Location B - Figures 2 & 3)
1.2 LEDs
The FreeWave Radio is supplied with three (3) visible LEDs that provide important information on the operation of the transceiver. Compare the status of radio’s LEDs with
Tables 1 and 2 to aid you in the troubleshooting process.
CD - Carrier Detect LED
TX Transmit LED
CTS - Clear To Send LED
CI-3530-15B Appendix I Page 1 FreeWave Radio Option
Table 1 - LED Status in Point to Point Communications
Condition
Power Disconnected
Connected, no repeater, sending sparse data
Master calling slave through repeater
Master connected to
Repeater, not to slave
Repeater connected to slave
Mode 6, disconnected
Setup Mode
Master Slave Repeater
CD TX CTS CD TX CTS CD TX CTS
SR SR SR SR O BR SR O BR
SG IF IF SG IF IF
SR SD
FO SD
SG
SR
IF
O
SG SG
SR
SR
IF
BR
SG
SR
SR
SG
SR
SG
O
O
IF
O
SG
BR
BR
IF
SG
SR
SR
SG
SG
O
SD
IF
SG
BR
SR
IF
SG
Table 1 & Table 2 Legend:
BR
FO
IF
O
SD
SG
SR
Blinking Red
Flashing Orange
Intermittent Flash Red
Off
Solid Red, Dim
Solid Green
Solid Red, Bright
Table 2 - LED Status in Multipoint Communications
Condition
Power Disconnected
Repeater & slave connected to master, no data
Repeater & slave connected to master, master sending data to slave
Repeater & slave connected to master, slave sending data to master
Master Slave Repeater
CD TX CTS CD TX CTS CD TX CTS
SR SD O SR O BR SR O BR
SR
SR
SG-
SR
SD
SD
SD
O
O
IF
SG
SG
SG
O
O
IF
SR*
SR*
SR*
SG
SG
SG
SD
SD
SR
SR*
SR*
SR*
* = CTS will be Solid Red with a solid link, as the link weakens the CTS LED on the repeater and slave radios will begin to flash.
FreeWave Radio Option Page 2 CI-3530-15B Appendix I
Figure 1 - FreeWave Radio
Figure 2 - Radio Mounting Plate installation Diagram
CI-3530-15B Appendix I Page 3 FreeWave Radio Option
Section 2
INSTALLATION & SERVICE
2.1 RADIO REMOVAL/REPLACEMENT & INSTALLATION
DANGER
The FreeWave Wireless Data Transceiver (Radio) model DGRO-115 provided by Bristol Babcock is approved for use in Class I, Division 2,
Groups A, B, C & D or non-hazardous locations. The installer must be familiar with hazardous location installation guidelines before installation or maintenance is undertaken. Do not begin radio installation or service to the TeleFlow J unless the area is known to be non-hazardous.
AVOID OPERATING EQUIPMENT DURING AN ELECTRICAL STORM. THE
IMPULSE SUPPRESSOR MAY SAVE EQUIPMENT FROM DANGER, BUT
SHOULD NOT BE CONSIDERED AS BEING SAFE FOR PERSONNEL.
2.1.1 Radio Removal/Replacement Procedure
To remove the Radio follow steps 1 through 6 below. To replace the Radio perform step 6 of section 2.1.2 and then follow steps 2 through 6 below in reverse order, installing rather than removing the item in question and then perform step 7.
1. Loosen the three (3) quarter-turn fasteners (and remove the lock if present) which secure the Instrument Front Cover. Open the Instrument Front Cover.
2. Disconnect power from the radio by removing the two-wire auxiliary power jack from the TeleRTU CPU Board connector P4.
3. Disconnect the Radio/TeleFlow Interface Cable (396369-01-4) from the lower edge of the radio.
4. Unscrew the Antenna Lead from the bottom of the radio.
5. Unscrew the four (4) screws that secure the radio (via the Radio Mounting Plate) to the
Radio/Modem Mounting Plate (Battery Cover) (Location B Figure 2).
6. Remove the FreeWave radio (installed on the Radio Mounting Plate).
7. Close and secure the Door.
FreeWave Radio Option Page 4 CI-3530-15B Appendix I
Figure 3 - FreeWave Radio Option Installed in TeleFlow
(without Polyphaser Option)
2.1.2 Radio Installation Procedure
To install the FreeWave Radio Option into a TeleFlow (for the first time) follow steps 1 through 9 below.
1.
Loosen the three (3) quarter-turn fasteners (and remove the lock if present) which secure the Instrument Front Cover. Open the Instrument Front Cover.
2.
Loosen the four screws that secure the Radio/Modem Mounting Plate (Battery Cover) to the Battery Mounting Bracket (Location A - Figure 3) and remove the Radio/Modem
Mounting Plate.
CI-3530-15B Appendix I Page 5 FreeWave Radio Option
3. Install the FreeWave radio (mounted on the Radio Mounting Plate) onto the
Radio/Modem Mounting Plate using four (4) 4-40 x 1/4 pan head screws (see Figures 4
& 2).
Figure 4 - FreeWave Radio Mounted on Radio Mounting Plate
4. Install the Radio/Modem Mounting Plate (with radio installed) onto the TeleRTU’s
Batery Mounting Bracket. Secure the screws loosened in step 2 (Location A - Figure 3).
5. Install the Radio Cable (396306-01-2) between the radio’s RF connector and the bottom of the TeleRTU enclosure (see Figure 3 & 5) (also see Section 2.3.1 of CI-3530-15B).
Note: If an optional Polyphaser is used install Radio Cable (396306-02-0) between the radio’s RF connector and the top of the Polyphaser (within the enclosure) (see Figure 6). TeleRTU enclosures that support a Polyphaser have is
.625” diameter mounting hole while those that support a radio (without Polyphaser
Option) have a .580” diameter mounting hole.
FreeWave Radio Option Page 6 CI-3530-15B Appendix I
Figure 5 - Top View - TeleFlow with FreeFlow Radio (without Polyphaser)
Figure 6 - Partial View - TeleFlow with Polyphaser Installed
CI-3530-15B Appendix I Page 7 FreeWave Radio Option
6. Follow the “Tuning Transceiver Performance” section of the FreeWave Technologies,
Inc. FreeWave Spread Spectrum Wireless Data Transceiver User Manual to configure the radio.
Note: The setup program is invoked by connecting the radio to any PC equipped with a terminal program (such as Hyperterminal), setting the parameters for that terminal to those of Table 3, and putting the radio into setup mode.
Connection to the PC requires a special RS-232 cable with a 9-pin Female D-
Type connector on the PC side and a 10-pin Female MTA-100 Connector assembly on the radio side. A cable can be constructed as illustrated in Figure
7. The terminal program must be running before invoking the setup program.
The setup program is invoked by shorting MTA-100 Connector pins 4 (GND) and 2 (MENU) together.
Table 3 - Setup Menu Terminal Settings
PARAMETER
Baud Rate
Data Rate
Parity
Stop Bits
Parity Check
Carrier Detect
SETTING
19,200
8
None
1
None/Off
None/Off
Figure 7 - Cable Diagram for Radio to PC Interface
7. Install the TeleRTU Radio Interface Cable (396369-01-4) between Radio Connector J1 and TeleRTU CPU Board Connectors J4 & J8 (see Table 4). Make sure that the cable connector’s red wire aligns with FreeWave Radio connector Pin 1 (see Figures 1 & 3).
8. Connect the Antenna Cable between the remote Antenna and the Radio Cable (or
Polyphaser on the bottom of the TeleRTU.
9. Close and secure the Door.
FreeWave Radio Option Page 8 CI-3530-15B Appendix I
2.2 WIRING LISTS
Radio/TeleRTU Interface Cable (396369-01-4)
CPU Pin #
J4-1
J4-2
J8-1
J8-2
J8-4
J8-5
J8-6
J8-7
CPU Board
Sig. Name
AUX PWR
GND
GND
RDCD
RCTS
RRTS
RRXD
RTXD
Wire Pin. #
& Color
01 (Red)
04 (Black)
06 (Black)
08 (Green)
10 (Brown)
09 (Blue)
05 (Red)
07 (White)
Note: Pins 2 & 3 are not used.
Radio
Signal Name
B+
GND
GND
DCD (Out)
CTS (Out)
RTS (In)
TXD (Out)
RXD (In)
Function
DC Power (+)
DC Power (-) Ground
Ground
Data Carrier Detect Output
Clear To Send Output
Request To Send Input
Transmit Data Output
Receive Data Input
Table 4 - Radio/TeleRTU Interface Cable (396369-01-4) Wire List
2.3 ADDITIONAL FreeWave INFORMATION
The FreeWave Spread Spectrum Wireless Data Transceiver User Manual contains indepth details on modem parameters, operation, installation, tuning transceiver performance, and more. Copies of the FreeWave Spread Spectrum Wireless Data
Transceiver User Manual can be obtained from FreeWave Technologies, Inc.
(electronically) by contacting their Technical Support Group.
FreeWave Tech. Support can be reached at 303-444-3862 or 303-786-9948.
Online information about Spread Spectrum Modem (Model DRG09RFS) can be obtained at www.freewave.com or www.freewave.com/ProductInformation/products.htm.
CI-3530-15B Appendix I Page 9 FreeWave Radio Option
Section 3
SPECIFICATIONS
3.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Frequency:
Power Requirements:
Transmit Current:
Receive Cuurrent:
Idle Current:
Operating Modes:
3.3 RECEIVER SPECIFICATIONS
Sensitivity:
902 - 928 MHz
650 mA at 12V for 1W
600 mA at 8.5V for 400mW
100 mA at 12V
65 mA at 12V
Point-to-Point
Point-to-Multipoint
Peer-to-Peer
Store and Forward Repeater
Data Transmission:
Error Detection:
Data Encryption:
Link Throughput:
Interface:
32 Bit CRC, resend on error
Substitution, dynamic key
115 Kbaud
RS-232, 1200 Baud to 115.2 Kbaud,
Async., full duplex
3.2 TRANSMITTER SPECIFICATIONS
Output Power:
Range:
Modulation:
Occupied Bandwidth:
1W (+30 dBm) at 9.5V to 18.0V
400mW (+25 dBm) at 7.5V to 9.5V
20 Miles - Line of sight distance with unity gain antenna at 900 MHz.
GFSK, 120 kBs - 170 kBs
230 kHz
-108 dB at 10 -6 raw BER
FreeWave Radio Option Page 10 CI-3530-15B Appendix I
Selectivity: 40 dB at fc ±230kHz
60 dB at fc ±460 kHz
3.4 ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS
Temperature Range:
Humidity:
Full Performance -40 ° C to +60 ° C,
(-40 ° F to +140 ° F)
5% to 90% (noncondensing)
CI-3530-15B Appendix I Page 11 FreeWave Radio Option
BLANK PAGE
EXPANSION COMMUNICATIONS
PORT RS-232 BOARD
Part No. 392970-01-5
(For Models 3530-XXX)
For The Following BBI Instruction Manuals:
CI-3530-10B, CI-3530-15B, CI-3530-20B, CI-3530-25B,
CI-3530-35B, CI-3530-40B, CI-3530-45B & CI-3530-50B
Product Information Package
Bristol Babcock
PIP-EXP232TF – December, 2003
NOTICE
Copyright Notice
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made to supply complete and accurate information. However, Bristol Babcock assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this document.
Request for Additional Instructions
Additional copies of instruction manuals may be ordered from the address below per attention of the Sales Order Processing Department. List the instruction book numbers or give complete model number, serial or software version number. Furnish a return address that includes the name of the person who will receive the material. Billing for extra copies will be according to current pricing schedules.
TeleFlow TM , TeleRTU TM and TeleRecorder TM are trademarks of Bristol Babcock. Other trademarks or copy-righted products mentioned in this document are for information only, and belong to their respective companies, or trademark holders.
Copyright (c) 2003 Bristol Babcock, 1100 Buckingham St., Watertown, CT 06795. No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form without the express written permission of
Bristol Babcock.
IMPORTANT! READ INSTRUCTIONS BEFORE STARTING!
Be sure that these instructions are carefully read and understood before any operation is attempted. Improper use of this device in some applications may result in damage or injury. The user is urged to keep this book filed in a convenient location for future reference.
These instructions may not cover all details or variations in equipment or cover every possible situation to be met in connection with installation, operation or maintenance. Should problems arise that are not covered sufficiently in the text, the purchaser is advised to contact Bristol Babcock for further information.
EQUIPMENT APPLICATION WARNING
The customer should note that a failure of this instrument or system, for whatever reason, may leave an operating process without protection. Depending upon the application, this could result in possible damage to property or injury to persons. It is suggested that the purchaser review the need for additional backup equipment or provide alternate means of protection such as alarm devices, output limiting, fail-safe valves, relief valves, emergency shutoffs, emergency switches, etc.
If additional information is required, the purchaser is advised to contact Bristol
Babcock.
RETURNED EQUIPMENT WARNING
When returning any equipment to Bristol Babcock for repairs or evaluation, please note the following: The party sending such materials is responsible to ensure that the materials returned to Bristol Babcock are clean to safe levels, as such levels are defined and/or determined by applicable federal, state and/or local law regulations or codes. Such party agrees to indemnify Bristol Babcock and save Bristol Babcock harmless from any liability or damage which Bristol Babcock may incur or suffer due to such party’s failure to so act.
ELECTRICAL GROUNDING
Metal enclosures and exposed metal parts of electrical instruments must be grounded in accordance with OSHA rules and regulations pertaining to "Design
Safety Standards for Electrical Systems," 29 CFR, Part 1910, Subpart S, dated: April
16, 1981 (OSHA rulings are in agreement with the National Electrical Code).
The grounding requirement is also applicable to mechanical or pneumatic instruments that include electrically-operated devices such as lights, switches, relays, alarms, or chart drives.
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE FROM ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE VOLTAGE
This product contains sensitive electronic components that can be damaged by exposure to an electrostatic discharge (ESD) voltage. Depending on the magnitude and duration of the ESD, this can result in erratic operation or complete failure of the equipment. Read BBI supplemental document S14006 for proper care and handling of ESD-sensitive components.
Bristol Babcock 1100 Buckingham Street, Watertown, CT 06795
Telephone (860) 945-2200
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
A.
B.
WARRANTY
Bristol warrants that goods described herein and manufactured by Bristol are free from defects in material and workmanship for one year from the date of shipment unless otherwise agreed to by Bristol in writing.
Bristol warrants that goods repaired by it pursuant to the warranty are free from defects in material and workmanship for a period to the end of the original warranty or ninety (90) days from the date of delivery of repaired goods, whichever is longer.
Warranties on goods sold by, but not manufactured by Bristol are expressly limited to the terms of the warranties given by the manufacturer of such goods.
All warranties are terminated in the event that the goods or systems or any part thereof are (i) misused, abused or otherwise damaged, (ii) repaired, altered or modified without Bristol’s consent, (iii) not installed, maintained and operated in strict compliance with instructions furnished by Bristol, or (iv) worn, injured or damaged from abnormal or abusive use in service time.
THESE WARRANTIES ARE EXPRESSLY IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER
WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED (INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION
WARRANTIES AS TO MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE), AND NO WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, NOR ANY
REPRESENTATIONS, PROMISES, OR STATEMENTS HAVE BEEN MADE BY
BRISTOL UNLESS ENDORSED HEREIN IN WRITING. FURTHER, THERE ARE
NO WARRANTIES WHICH EXTEND BEYOND THE DESCRIPTION OF THE
FACE HEREOF.
No agent of Bristol is authorized to assume any liability for it or to make any written or oral warranties beyond those set forth herein.
REMEDIES
Buyer’s sole remedy for breach of any warranty is limited exclusively to repair or replacement without cost to Buyer of any goods or parts found by Seller to be defective if Buyer notifies Bristol in writing of the alleged defect within ten (10) days of discovery of the alleged defect and within the warranty period stated above, and if the Buyer returns such goods to Bristol’s Watertown office, unless Bristol’s Watertown office designates a different location, transportation prepaid, within thirty (30) days of the sending of such notification and which upon examination by Bristol proves to be defective in material and workmanship. Bristol is not responsible for any costs of removal, dismantling or reinstallation of allegedly defective or defective goods. If a Buyer does not wish to ship the product back to Bristol, the Buyer can arrange to have a Bristol service person come to the site. The Service person’s transportation time and expenses will be for the account of the Buyer. However, labor for warranty work during normal working hours is not chargeable.
Under no circumstances will Bristol be liable for incidental or consequential damages resulting from breach of any agreement relating to items included in this quotation from use of the information herein or from the purchase or use by Buyer, its employees or other parties of goods sold under said agreement.
How to return material for Repair or Exchange
Before a product can be returned to Bristol Babcock for repair, upgrade, exchange, or to verify proper operation, form (GBU 13.01) must be completed in order to obtain a RA
(Return Authorization) number and thus ensure an optimal lead time. Completing the form is very important since the information permits the Bristol Babcock Repair Dept. to effectively and efficiently process the repair order.
You can easily obtain a RA number by:
A. FAX
Completing the form (GBU 13.01) and faxing it to (860) 945-3875. A BBI Repair
Dept. representative will return call (or other requested method) with a RA number.
B. E-MAIL
Accessing the form (GBU 13.01) via the Bristol Babcock Web site
(www.bristolbabcock.com) and sending it via E-Mail to [email protected]
.
A BBI Repair Dept. representative will return E-Mail (or other requested method) with a RA number.
C. Mail
Mail the form (GBU 13.01) to
Bristol Babcock Inc.
Repair Dept.
1100 Buckingham Street
Watertown, CT 06795
A BBI Repair Dept. representative will return call (or other requested method) with a RA number.
D. Phone
Calling the BBI Repair Department at (860) 945-2442. A BBI Repair Department representative will record a RA number on the form and complete Part I, then send the form to the Customer via fax (or other requested method) for Customer completion of Parts II & III.
A copy of the completed Repair Authorization Form with issued RA number should be included with the product being returned. This will allow us to quickly track, repair, and return your product to you.
&VMWXSP&EFGSGO-RG6ITEMV%YXLSVM^EXMSR*SVQ
(Providing this information will permit BBI to effectively and efficiently process your return. Completion is required to receive optimal lead time. Lack of information may result in increased lead times.)
Date___________________ RA #___________________SH_ Line No.____________
Standard Repair Practice is as follows: Variations to this is practice may be requested in the “Special Requests” section.
•
Evaluate / Test / Verify Discrepancy
•
Repair / Replace / etc. in accordance with this form
•
Return to Customer
Part I
Please be aware of the Non warranty standard charge:
•
There is a $100 minimum evaluation charge, which is applied to the repair if applicable (
√
in “returned” B,C, or D of part III below)
Please complete the following information for single unit or multiple unit returns
Address No.
Bill to :
(office use only) Address No.
Ship to:
(office use only)
Purchase Order:
Phone: Fax:
Contact Name:____________________________________
E-Mail:
Part II Please complete Parts II & III for each unit returned
Model No./Part No.
Description
Range/Calibration
Reason for return : Failure Upgrade
S/N
Verify Operation Other
1.
Describe the conditions of the failure (Frequency/Intermittent, Physical Damage, Environmental Conditions,
Communication, CPU watchdog, etc.)
(Attach a separate sheet if necessary)
2. Comm. interface used: Standalone RS-485 Ethernet Modem (PLM (2W or 4W) or SNW) Other: ______________
3.
What is the Firmware revision? _____________________ What is the Software &version?
Part III If checking “replaced” for any question below, check an alternate option if replacement is not available
A.
If product is within the warranty time period but is excluded due to BBI’s warranty clause, would you like the product: repaired returned replaced scrapped?
B.
If product were found to exceed the warranty period, would you like the product:
C.
If product is deemed not repairable would you like your product:
D.
If BBI is unable to verify the discrepancy, would you like the product: repaired returned replaced scrapped?
returned replaced scrapped?
returned replaced *see below?
* Continue investigating by contacting the customer to learn more about the problem experienced? The person to contact that has the most knowledge of the problem is: _______________________________ phone
If we are unable to contact this person the backup person is: _________________________ phone
Special Requests:
Ship prepaid to: Bristol Babcock Inc., Repair Dept., 1100 Buckingham Street, Watertown, CT 06795
Phone: 860-945-2442 Fax: 860-945-3875
Form GBU 13.01
Rev. A
Bristol Babcock
Training
GET THE MOST FROM YOUR BRISTOL
BABCOCK INSTRUMENT OR SYSTEM
● Avoid Delays and problems in getting your system on-line
● Minimize installation, start-up and maintenance costs.
● Make the most effective use of our hardware and software.
● Know your system.
As you know, a well-trained staff is essential to your operation. Bristol Babcock offers a full schedule of classes conducted by full-time, professional instructors. Classes are offered throughout the year at three locations: Houston, Orlando and our Watertown, CT headquarters. By participating in our training, your personnel can learn how to install, calibrate, configure, program and maintain any and all Bristol Babcock products and realize the full potential of your system.
For information or to enroll in any class, contact our training department in Watertown at
(860) 945-2269. For Houston classes, you can also contact our Houston office, at (713) 685-
6200.
A Few Words About Bristol Babcock
For over 100 years, Bristol 7 has been providing innovative solutions for the measurement and control industry. Our product lines range from simple analog chart recorders, to sophisticated digital remote process controllers and flow computers, all the way to turnkey
SCADA systems. Over the years, we have become a leading supplier to the electronic gas measurement, water purification, and wastewater treatment industries.
On off-shore oil platforms, on natural gas pipelines, and maybe even at your local water company, there are Bristol Babcock instruments, controllers, and systems running year-in and year-out to provide accurate and timely data to our customers.
Getting Additional Information
In addition to the information contained in this manual, you may receive additional assistance in using this product from the following sources:
Contacting Bristol Babcock Directly
Bristol Babcock's world headquarters are located at 1100 Buckingham Street, Watertown,
Connecticut 06795, U.S.A.
Our main phone numbers are:
(860) 945-2200
(860) 945-2213 (FAX)
Regular office hours are Monday through Friday, 8:00AM to 4:30PM Eastern Time, excluding holidays and scheduled factory shutdowns. During other hours, callers may leave messages using Bristol's voice mail system.
Telephone Support - Technical Questions
During regular business hours, Bristol Babcock's Application Support Group can provide telephone support for your technical questions.
For technical questions about TeleFlow Ô products call (860) 945-8604.
For technical questions about Control Wave call (860) 945-2244 or (860) 945-2286.
For technical questions regarding Bristol’s OpenEnterprise product, call (860) 945-3865 or e-mail: [email protected]
For technical questions regarding ACCOL products, Open BSI Utilities , as well as
Bristol's Enterprise Server 7 / Enterprise Workstation 7 products, call (860) 945-2286.
For technical questions about Network 3000 hardware, call (860) 945-2502.
You can e-mail the Application Support Group at: [email protected]
The Application Support Group maintains an area on our web site for software updates and technical information. Go to: www.bristolbabcock.com/services/techsupport/
For assistance in interfacing Bristol Babcock hardware to radios, contact Bristol Babcock’s
Communication Technology Group in Orlando, FL at (407) 629-9463 or (407) 629-
9464 .
Telephone Support - Non-Technical Questions, Product Orders, etc.
Questions of a non-technical nature (product orders, literature requests, price and delivery information, etc.) should be directed to the nearest sales office (listed on the rear cover) or to your Bristol-authorized sales representative.
Please call the main Bristol Babcock number (860-945-2200) if you are unsure which office covers your particular area.
Visit our Site on the World Wide Web
For general information about Bristol Babcock and its products, please visit our site on the
World Wide Web at: www.bristolbabcock.com
Training Courses
Bristol Babcock’s Training Department offers a wide variety of courses in Bristol hardware and software at our Watertown, Connecticut headquarters, and at selected Bristol regional offices, throughout the year. Contact our Training Department at (860) 945-2269 for course information, enrollment, pricing, and scheduling.
PIP-EXP232TF
EXPANSION COMMUNICATIONS PORT
RS-232 BOARD
PT. Number 392970-01-5
Product Information Package
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.1
1.1.1
1.1.2
1.2
1.3
1.3.1
SECTION TITLE PAGE #
DESCRIPTION................................................................................................................... 1
Function .............................................................................................................................. 1
Features............................................................................................................................... 2
COMPONENT IDENTIFICATION................................................................................... 2
INSTALLATION COMPATIBILITY................................................................................ 2
Restrictions ......................................................................................................................... 2
2.1
2.1.1
2.1.1.1
2.1.1.2
2.1.1.3
2.2
Section 2 - INSTALLATION & SERVICE
EXPCOM232 REMOVAL/REPLACEMENT & INSTALLATION................................. 3
Installation/Removal of the EXPCOM232 Board .............................................................. 3
Installation/Removal for Models 3530-10B, -15B, -40B, -45B & -50B ............................ 3
Installation/Removal for Models 3530-20B & -25B ........................................................ 10
Installation/Removal for Models 3530-35B ..................................................................... 11
RS-232 WIRING............................................................................................................... 12
3.1
3.2
PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................ 15
ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS ....................................................................... 15
SUPPLEMENTS
PIP-EXP232TF Page 0-1 Table Of Contents
Section 1
INTRODUCTION
1.1 DESCRIPTION
1.1.1 Function
The Expansion Communications Port RS-232 Board (EXPCOM232) provides a single RS-
232 asynchronous serial communications port to ACCOL-based 3530-XXX models. In addition to assignments of the resident (host) CPU’s “local” and “network” RS-232 ports, any model 3530-XXX unit equipped with an EXPCOM232 Board can establish RS-232 communications with an external device. An EXPCOM232 Board plugs into the Expansion
Connector of the TeleFlow or TeleRTU CPU Board and is stood-off by three 15/32” long hex standoffs and is secured via three screws. The CPU Board Expansion Connector supplies power and 3530-XXX communication to the EXPCOM232 Board.
EXPCOM232 Boards measure 4.0” by 3.75” and utilizes a 7-position Industrial 3.5mm pitch plugable connector to interface with an external RS-232 device. 16V bi-directional
Transient Absorption Zener Diodes are placed across all RS-232 outputs.
Programmable baud rates up to 19.2Kbps are supported by the EXPCOM232 Board. TXD,
RXD, RTS, CTS, DTR, CD and GND (RS-232) signals are available at TB1 of the
EXPCOM232 Board. CD (Carrier Detect) (supplied by a DCE attempting to communicate with a model 3530-XXX), will awaken the 3530-XXX CPU Board. If no activity is required, the EXPCOM232 Board‘s serial communications controller (SCC) chip and RS-232 drivers can be put to sleep (low power mode) along with the host/parent 3530-XXX.
PIP-EXP232TF
Figure 1 - Expansion Communications Port RS-232 Board
Page 1 EXPCOM232 Option
1.1.2 Features
· Low Power
+5V @ 20mA (Max) regulated power is supplied by the host/parent 3530-XXX via the
40-pin Expansion Interface Connector P1.
· ESD & Transient Susceptibility
The RS-232 I/O circuitry has been designed to meet the requirements of IEC 801-2 for ESD withstand capability up to 10KV and the requirements of ANSI/IEEE
C37.90.1-1989 (formerly IEE 472) for surge withstand capability.
· EMI Compatibility
EXPCOM232 Boards have been designed to coexist inside a shielded enclosure with the TeleFlow ä electronics. EMI radiation is insignificant and susceptibility is comparable or superior to associated electronics.
· Mounting
The EXPCOM232 Board measures 3.75” (9.525cm) in width x 4.0” (10.160cm) in height and mounts piggy-back on a TeleFlow or TeleRTU CPU Board.
· RS-232 Serial Port
EXPCOM232 Boards provide an additional RS-232 serial port that is programmable for rates up to 19.2Kbps. 3530-XXX units equipped with the EXPCOM232 Board can communicate with a local RS-232 device even though a radio or modem may be installed on the CPU Board’s network port.
1.2 COMPONENT IDENTIFICATION
EXPCOM232 Boards do not contain LEDs, switches or configuration jumpers. Two connectors are provided; 40-pin connector P1 mates with the host 3530-XX-X (connector J4 -
TeleFlow CPU or J18 - TeleRTU CPU) and accommodates the TTL interface between the two entities, while 7-pin connector TB1 mates with the RS-232 device that is being interfaced to the 3530-XXX. Additionally, the 3.5mm pitch plugable connector TB1 is removable from its mating EXPCOM232 Board socket.
1.3 INSTALLATION COMPATIBILITY
An EXPCOM232 Board can be installed into any of the following 3530-XXX models:
3530-10B - TeleFlow
3530-15B - TeleRTU
3530-35B - TeleRTU Module
3530-40B - TeleFlow ECR
3530-20B - TeleFlow Plus 3530-45B - TeleRecorder
3530-25B - TeleRTU Plus 3530-50B - TeleFlow Corrector
1.3.1 Restrictions
The 3530-XXX in question must be equipped with ACCOL application software. 3530-XXX units support installation of only one optional piggyback mounted Expansion Board (I/O,
Comm. or TIB).
EXPCOM232 Option Page 2 PIP-EXP232TF
Section 2
INSTALLATION & SERVICE
2.1 EXPCOM232 REMOVAL/REPLACEMENT & INSTALLATION
2.1.1 Installation/Removal of the EXPCOM232 Board
In addition to hardware normally contained within the 3530-XXX in question, units with an installed EXPCOM232 Option will contain the following major parts.
1.
Expanded Communications Port RS-232 Board (EXPCOM232)
2.
Three #4-40 x 15/32” Standoffs (Note: Models 3530-10B, - 15B, -40B, -45B & -50B will also contain Three (3) #4-40 x .188” Standoffs & Two (2) #4-40 x 1/8” SEM Screws)
3.
Modified PC Shield Assembly (for models 3530-10B, -15B, -40B, -45B & -50B)
WARNING
Never attempt to service a TeleFlow, TeleRTU,
TeleRecorder or TeleFlow Corrector while it is powered and operating in a hazardous environment. Either the area must be made safe or the unit must be powered down, unwired, unmounted, and taken to a safe, nonhazardous area.
WARNING
Never attempt to install or remove any components
(PCBs, Field Wiring, Transducers, etc.) while the unit is powered and running. Doing so can cause sudden electrical transients or imbalances that are capable of causing damage to the module or component in question, as well as other associated circuit boards. Always turn off the external/internal power source, including any additional supply sources used for externally-powered
I/O circuits, before changing or adding any components.
CAUTION
Place any related critical processes under manual or auxiliary control prior to shutting down or performing any of the steps discussed herein.
2.1.1.1 Installation/Removal for Models 3530-10B, -15B, -40B, -45B & -50B
To install the optional EXPCOM232 Board into a model 3530-10B, -15B, -40B, -45B or -
50B, follow steps 1 through 14 below. To remove the optional EXPCOM232 Board, see step
15. Note: The Instrument Front Cover must be open.
1.
To open the Instrument Front Cover, remove the lock if present and turn each of the three captive screws a quarter (1/4) turn counterclockwise.
PIP-EXP232TF Page 3 EXPCOM232 Option
Note:
The CPU Board is not to be removed under any circumstances unless the unit has been moved to an ESD safe area (see ESDS Manual - S14006).
2.
Remove the Power Plug(s), Solar Panel Power Plug, and the Auxiliary Power Plug as required, from the CPU Board in question.
3.
Remove the optional radio or modem if installed.
To remove an optional modem :
Disconnect the phone wires. Loosen the four (4) screws that secure the Modem/Radio
Mounting Plate (with modem) to the Battery Mounting Bracket. Slide the modem to the left and remove it and then disconnect the D-Type connector from the modem.
To remove an optional radio :
Disconnect the Radio/TeleFlow Interface Cable from the bottom of the Radio. Unplug the 2-wire power connector associated with the 2-wire Radio Power Interface Cable from the bottom of the Radio. Loosen the four (4) screws that secure the Modem/Radio
Mounting Plate (with radio) to the Battery Mounting Bracket. Slide the radio to the left and remove it.
4.
Remove the Battery(s) (if present).
To remove the battery(s) from units without an optional modem or radio :
Hold the battery securely and remove the Left Battery Mounting Bracket (secured with 2 screws. Loosen the screws which secure the Right Battery Mounting Bracket
(Carefully remove the battery (with wiring harness). Remove the Right Battery
Mounting Bracket.
To remove the battery(s) from units with an optional modem or radio :
Carefully remove the battery (with wiring harness). Note: You may have to loosen the two left 1/4-20 x 3/8” screws that secure the left side of the Battery Mounting Bracket and the Main Mounting Bracket to the rear of the unit.
While holding the Main
Mounting Bracket, remove the four (4) 1/4-20 x 3/8” screws and lock washers that secure the Battery Mounting Bracket and Main Mounting Bracket to the rear of the unit. Remove the Battery Mounting Bracket and temporarily reinstall the four screws to secure the Main Mounting Bracket to the 3530-10B, 15B, -45B or -50B.
5.
Disconnect the Local Port, Network Port, RTD, and Field I/O wires from the CPU Bd.
connectors by unplugging their associated Term. Plugs on the front edge of the CPU.
6. Carefully remove the PC Shield which is secured to the Main Mounting Bracket by 2
(#4-40 x 1/4”) screws and to the CPU Board by 2 (#4-40 x 1/4”) screws.
7. Remove the screw (location ‘A’ in Figures 2 & 3) and the two (2) #4-40 x 5/8” Standoffs
(location ‘B’ in Figures 2 & 3) which secure the CPU Board to the Main Mounting
Bracket. Replace these items with the three new #4-40 x 15/32” Standoffs.
Note:
This operation should only be performed in an ESD safe area.
8.
Align the EXPCOM232 Board Connector P1 with CPU Board Connector J4 (for 3530-
10B, 40B or -50B) or J18 (for 3530-15B & -45B). Push the EXPCOM232 Board toward the CPU Board until Connector P1 is fully seated.
EXPCOM232 Option Page 4 PIP-EXP232TF
Figure 2 - TeleFlow CPU Board – Installation Drawing #1
9.
Secure the EXPCOM232 Board to the CPU Board by installing three (3) #4-40 x .188”
Standoffs at locations ‘A’ and ‘B’ (see Figures 2 & 3).
10. Carefully install the Modified PC Shield, securing it to the Main Mounting Bracket (at locations ‘C’) with two #4-40 x 1/4” screws and to the CPU Board (at locations ‘B’) with two (2) #4-40 x 1/8” SEM screws (see Figures 4, 5, 6 & 7).
11. Follow steps 2 through 6 in reverse order, replacing rather than removing the item in question.
PIP-EXP232TF Page 5 EXPCOM232 Option
12.
Connect wiring between the EXPCOM232 Board and the DTE/DCE device to which it is to be interfaced (see Section 2.2).
13.
Configure the new network port in the ACCOL Load resident in the host 3530-XXX device.
Figure 3 - TeleRTU CPU Board – Installation Drawing #1
14.
Close and secure the Instrument Front Cover.
15. To remove an optional EXPCOM232 Board, follow steps 1 through 6 (unplug the RS-
232 cable during step 5). Remove the PC Shield along with the three Standoffs that
EXPCOM232 Option Page 6 PIP-EXP232TF
secure the EXPCOM232 Board to the CPU Board. Then unplug the EXPCOM232
Board from the CPU Board in question.
Figure 4 - TeleFlow CPU Board (with EXPCOM232 Installed)
Installation Drawing #2
PIP-EXP232TF Page 7 EXPCOM232 Option
Figure 5 - TeleRTU CPU Board (with EXPCOM232 Installed)
Installation Drawing #2
EXPCOM232 Option Page 8 PIP-EXP232TF
Figure 6 - 3530-10B, 3530-40B & 3530-50B (with EXPCOM232 Installed)
Figure 7 - 3530-15B & 3530-45B (with EXPCOM232 Installed)
PIP-EXP232TF Page 9 EXPCOM232 Option
2.1.1.2 Installation/Removal for Models 3530-20B & -25B
To install the optional EXPCOM232 Board into a model 3530-20B or 3530-25B, follow steps
1 through 11 below. To remove the optional EXPCOM232 Board, perform steps 1 and 2 and then follow steps 4 through 9 in reverse order, removing rather than installing the item in question after the system has been shut down. Note: The Instrument Front Cover must be open.
1.
Open the Instrument Front Cover
2.
Disconnect power by removing harness connector plug (P8 for TeleFlow - P2 for
TeleRTU) from the CPU Board edge connector (J8 for TeleFlow – J2 for TeleRTU).
Figure 8 - 3530-20B CPU (with EXPCOM232 Installed)
3.
Unplug the remaining removable Terminal Blocks (with wiring harnesses installed) from the CPU Board’s front edge connectors.
4.
Remove the two screws that secure the CPU Board’s Sliding Mounting Bracket to the
Fixed Bracket on the bottom of the Battery Bracket. Carefully slide the CPU Board
(and optional EXPCOM232 Board) toward the front of the unit. Remove harness connections from the Front Panel Switch (J12 on the TeleFlow CPU - J14 on TeleRTU
CPU), the Display Module (J2 on TeleFlow CPU - J16 on TeleRTU CPU), the Wakeup
Switch (J3 on TeleFlow CPU - J16 on TeleRTU CPU), and for TeleFlow CPU Boards connector J1 (associated with the Multivariable Transducer).
5.
Remove the three screws (of five) that secure the CPU Board to the Sliding Mounting
Bracket (locations ‘A’ & ‘B’ in Figures 2 & 3) and replace these items with the three new #4-40 x 15/32” Standoffs.
Note:
This operation should only be performed in an ESD safe area.
6.
Align the EXPCOM232 Board Connector P1 with CPU Board Connector J4 (for 3530-
20B) or J18 (for 3530-25B). Push the EXPCOM232 Board toward the CPU Board until
Connector P1 is fully seated.
7.
Secure the EXPCOM232 Board to the CPU Board by installing three (3) #4-40 x 1/4”
SEM screws as illustrated in Figures 8 & 9.
EXPCOM232 Option Page 10 PIP-EXP232TF
Figure 9 - 3530-25B CPU (with EXPCOM232 Installed)
8.
Route the RS-232 cable through a ¾” conduit fitting (user installed) on the bottom of the enclosure.
9.
Connect wiring between the EXPCOM232 Board and the DTE/DCE device to which it is to be interfaced (see Section 2.2).
10.
Configure the new network port in the ACCOL Load resident in the host 3530-XXX device.
11. Close and secure the Instrument Front Cover.
2.1.1.3 Installation/Removal for Models 3530-35B
To install the optional EXPCOM232 Board into a model 3530-35B, follow steps 1 through 8 below. To remove the optional EXPCOM232 Board, perform step 1 and then follow steps 5 through 7 in reverse order, removing rather than installing the item in question after the system has been shut down.
1.
Disconnect power by removing harness connector plug P2 from the CPU Board edge connector J2.
2. Unplug the remaining removable Terminal Blocks (with wiring harnesses installed) from the CPU Board’s front edge connectors.
3. Remove harness connections from the Front Panel Switch (J14), the Display Module
(J16) and the Wakeup Switch (J16).
4.
Remove the three screws (of five) that secure the CPU Board to the RTU Mounting
Bracket (locations ‘A’ & ‘B’ in Figures 2 & 3) and replace these items with the three new #4-40 x 15/32” Standoffs.
Note:
This operation should only be performed in an ESD safe area.
5.
Align the EXPCOM232 Board Connector P1 with CPU Board Connector J18. Push the
EXPCOM232 Board toward the CPU Board until Connector P1 is fully seated.
PIP-EXP232TF Page 11 EXPCOM232 Option
6.
Secure the EXPCOM232 Board to the CPU Board by installing three (3) #4-40 x 1/4”
SEM screws as illustrated in Figure 10.
7.
Connect wiring between the EXPCOM232 Board and the DTE/DCE device to which it is to be interfaced (see Section 2.2).
8.
Configure the new network port in the ACCOL Load resident in the host 3530-XXX device.
Figure 10 - 3530-35B (with EXPCOM232 Installed)
2.2 RS-232 WIRING
Table 2-1 and Figure 11 must be referenced to configure the RS-232 cable. Pin 2 of TB1 =
DCD (Data Carrier Detect - DCD). DCD can be used to awaken the 3530-XXX in question from power conservation (sleep) mode. This signal is not supplied by DTE equipment.
EXPCOM232 Option Page 12 PIP-EXP232TF
PIP-EXP232TF
Figure 11 - EXPCOM232 Wiring Diagrams
Page 13 EXPCOM232 Option
Either an RS-232 level control signal (high) can be supplied to TB1-2, or TB1-2 may be connected to the EXC signal on the CPU Board. It must be noted that as long as TB1-2
(DCD) remains HIGH, the 3530-XXX in question will remain awake. Therefore, if TB1-2 is connected to an EXC signal on the resident CPU Board, power conservation will be defeated, thus reducing the battery back-up time.
RS-232 cables are typically short (20’ or less in length). When significant distances are a factor (i.e., between an EXPCOM232 Board and the remote Data Terminal Device (DTE) to which it is desired to communicate), the RS-232 Port (TB1) cable can be connected to the
RS-232 Port of a modem or that of a BBI Isolated RS-485 Board (see Table 2-1).
Table 2-1
EXPCOM232 Board (DTE) & DCE/DTE - RS-232 Port Pin Assignments
EXPCOM232
RS-232 – TB1
DTE
2 - DCD (In)
6 - RXD (In)
7 - TXD (Out)
3 - DTR (Out)
1 - GND
-
5 - RTS (Out)
4 - CTS (In)
-
EXPCOM232
RS-232 TB1 or
3530 Network
Port J13/J8
DTE
-
7 - TXD (Out)
6 - RXD (In)
-
1 - GND
-
4 - CTS (In)
5 - RTS (Out)
-
Modem
9-Pin – J4
DCE
1 - DCD (Out)
2 - RXD (Out)
3 - TXD (In)
4 - DTR (In)
5 - GND
6 - DSR (Out)
7 - RTS (In)
8 - CTS (Out)
9 - N/A
PC
(RS-232)
3310/30/35
3305
3332
Notes 1 & 2
BBI
Isolated RS-485
Board Option
J1
DTE
-
DTE
-
DTE
-
3 - TXD (Out) 2 - TXD (Out) 7 - TXD (Out)
2 - RXD (In)
-
4 - RXD (In)
-
6 - RXD (In)
-
5 - GND
-
8 - CTS (In)
7 - RTS (Out)
-
9 - GND
-
6 - CTS (In)
5 - RTS (Out)
-
1 - GND
-
4 - CTS (In)
5 - RTS (Out)
-
Note 1: Ports BIP1 & BIP2
BIP1 and BIP2 are RS-562 Ports (RS-232 compatible.
Note 2: 3310 Ports A & C (MFIB Board)
A & C are RS-423 Ports (RS-232 compatible).
3330 Ports A, B, C, D, G, H, I & J (Enhanced Comm. Boards)
ECB’s 392587-01-7, 392587-02-5, 392587-03-3 & 392903-01-6
A, B, C, D, G, H, I & J are RS-562 Ports (RS-232 compatible).
3335 Ports A, B, C, D, I & J (Enhanced Comm. Boards)
ECB’s 392589-01-0 & 392589-02-8
A, B, C, D, I & J are RS-232 Ports
3335 Ports A, B, C & D (Comm. Engine Boards)
CEB’s 392043-01-7 & 392058-01-4
A, B, C & D are RS-423 Ports (RS-232 compatible)
The device uses compression-type terminals that accommodate up to #14 AWG wire. A connection is made by inserting the bared end (1/4 inch Max.) into the clamp beneath the screw and then securing the screw. Insert the bared end fully to prevent short circuits.
Allow some slack in the wires when making terminal connections. The slack makes the connections more manageable and minimizes mechanical strain on the printed circuit boards and harnesses.
EXPCOM232 Option Page 14 PIP-EXP232TF
Section 3
SPECIFICATIONS
3.1 PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS
Baud Rate (Max.):
Power Requirements:
Transient Protection:
RS-232 Outputs:
RS-232 Inputs:
RS-232 Ground:
RS-232 Interface Connector:
19.2K Asynchronous
+5Vdc @ 20mA Max. (Regulated)
16V Bi-directional Transient Absorption Zeners across all
RS-232 outputs
TXD (TB1-7)
DTR (TB1-3)
RTS (TB1-5)
DCD (TB1-2)
RXD (TB1-6)
CTS (TB1-4)
GND (TB1-1)
7-Pin Industrial 3.5mm Pitch Plugable Connector
3.2 ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS
Operating Temperature:
Storage Temperature:
Humidity:
ESD Susceptibility:
EMI Compatibility:
Transient Susceptibility:
-40 ° to +60 ° (C) [-40 ° to 140 ° (F)]
-40 ° to +85 ° (C) [-40 ° to 185 ° (F)]
15% to 90% RH (Non-Condensing)
Meets the requirement of IEC 801-2 for ESD withstand
Capability up to 10KV.
Designed to coexist inside a shielded enclosure with the
TeleFlow electronics. EMI radiation is insignificant and
Susceptibility is comparable or superior to associated
Electronics.
Designed to meet the requirements of ANSI/IEEE
C37.90.1-1989 (Formerly IEEE 472) for surge withstand
Capability.
PIP-EXP232TF Page 15 EXPCOM232 Option
Expansion Communications Port RS-232 Board
Special Instructions for Class I, Division 2 Hazardous Locations
1. The BBI Expansion Communications Port RS-232 Board is listed by Underwriters
Laboratories (UL) as nonincendive and is suitable for use in Class I, Division 2, Groups
A, B, C and D hazardous locations or non-hazardous locations only. Read this document carefully before installing a nonincendive BBI Expansion Communications Port RS-232
Board. In the event of a conflict between the Expansion Communications Port RS-232
Board User Manual (PIP-EXP232TF) and this document, always follow the instructions in this document.
2. Wiring must be performed in accordance with Class I, Division 2 wiring methods as defined in Article 501-4 (b) of the National Electrical Code, NFPA 70 for installations within the United States, or as specified in Section 18-152 of the Canadian Electrical
Code for installation in Canada.
3. WARNING: EXPLOSION HAZARD - Substitution of components may impair suitability for use in Class I, Division 2 environments.
4. WARNING: EXPLOSION HAZARD - When situated in a hazardous location, turn off power before servicing/replacing the unit and before installing or removing I/O wiring.
5. WARNING: EXPLOSION HAZARD - Do Not disconnect equipment unless the power has been switched off or the area is known to be nonhazardous.
07/17/2000 Appendix A of PIP-EXP232TF - EXPCOM232 Board Page 1 of 1
Expansion Communications Port RS-232 Board for 3530-XXX
Special Instructions for Class I, Division 1 Hazardous Locations
1.
A version of the Expansion Communications Port RS-232 Board is available that is listed by Underwriters Laboratories (UL) as intrinsically safe for use in Class I, Division
1, Groups C and D hazardous locations. Read this document carefully before installing an intrinsically safe Expansion Communications Port RS-232 Board. Refer to the
Expansion Communications Port RS-232 Board User’s Manual (PIP-EXP232TF) for general information. In the event of a conflict between the Expansion Communications
Port RS-232 Board User’s Manual and this document, always follow the instructions in this document.
2.
Unless the Expansion Communications Port RS-232 Board is used in conjunction with an IStran Communications Interface Assembly (see CI-3530-Istran) it may not be used in a Class I, Division 1 hazardous location.
3.
When a TeleFlow equipped with an Expansion Communications Port RS-232 Board is used in a Class I, Division 1 location, it must be used in conjunction with a BBI IStran
Communications Interface and installed per instruction manual CI-3530-IStran and
PIP-EXP232TF.
4.
The IStran and Expansion Communications Port RS-232 Board can be located in a nonhazardous or Division 2 rated area, while the TeleFlow can reside in a Division 1, 2 or nonhazardous area.
A suitable enclosure must be provided for the IStran. When the IStran is mounted in a
Division 2 area, the nonhazardous interface connections shall be made in accordance with Article 501-4(b) of the National Electrical Code NFPA 70.
CAUTION
When connecting the IStran and Expansion Communications
Port RS-232 Board to a TeleFlow that is mounted in a Division
1 area, wire all circuits using wiring methods specified in article 504 of the National Electrical Code NFPA 70. Contact your IStran supplier for assistance.
When installing an Expansion Communications Port RS-232
Board in a TeleFlow that is mounted in a Division 2 area, ensure that the area is nonhazardous before connecting or disconnecting the nonhazardous interface.
5.
Figures B1 through B4 show variations of approved connections to the Expansion
Communications Port RS-232 Board via a BBI IStran Communications Interface
Assembly.
12/12/03 Appendix B - Document PIP-EXP232TF Page 1 of 3
Expansion Communications Port RS-232 Board for 3530-XXX
Special Instructions for Class I, Division 1 Hazardous Locations
Figure B1 - Intrinsically Safe System with Radio and EXPCOM232 Board
(with Single Power Source)
Figure B2 - Intrinsically Safe System with Modem and EXPCOM232 Board
(with Single Power Source)
12/12/03 Appendix B - Document PIP-EXP232TF Page 2 of 3
Expansion Communications Port RS-232 Board for 3530-XXX
Special Instructions for Class I, Division 1 Hazardous Locations
Figure B3 - Intrinsically Safe System with Modem and EXPCOM232 Board
(with Independent Power Sources)
Figure B4 - Intrinsically Safe System with Radio and EXPCOM232 Board
(with Independent Power Sources)
12/12/03 Appendix B - Document PIP-EXP232TF Page 3 of 3
BLANK PAGE
READER RESPONSE FORM
Please help us make our documentation more useful to you! If you have a complaint, a suggestion, or a correction regarding this manual, please tell us by mailing this page with your comments. It's the only way we know we're doing our job by giving you correct, complete, and useful documentation.
DOCUMENT NUMBER: PIP-EXP232TF
TITLE: EXPANSION COMMUNICATIONS PORT RS-232 BOARD (for Models 3530-XXX)
Product Information Package
ISSUE DATE: DEC., 2003
COMMENT/COMPLAINT:
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
Mail this page to:
Bristol Babcock Inc.
1100 Buckingham Street
Watertown, CT 06795
Attn: Technical Publications Group, Dept. 315
Bristol Babcock
1100 Buckingham Street
Watertown, CT 06795
Phone: +1 (860) 945-2200
Fax: +1 (860) 945-2213
Website: www.bristolbabcock.com
U.S.A. Locations:
Northern Region
Bristol Babcock Inc.
1100 Buckingham Street
Watertown, CT 06795
Phone: +1 (860) 945-2381
Fax: +1 (860) 945-2525
Gulf Coast Region
Bristol Babcock Inc.
2000 Governor's Circle
Suite F
Houston, TX 77092-8731
Phone: +1 (713) 685-6200
Fax: +1 (713) 681-7331
Western Region
Bristol Babcock Inc.
1609 South Grove Avenue
Suites 106 & 107
Ontario, CA 91761
Phone: +1 (909) 923-8488
Fax: +1 (909) 923-8988
Southeast Region
Bristol Babcock Inc.
317 S. North Lake Blvd.
Suite 1016
Altamonte Springs, FL 32701
Phone: +1 (407) 740-7084
Fax: +1 (407) 629-2106
Helicoid Instruments
1100 Buckingham Street
Watertown, CT 06795
Phone: +1 (860) 945-2218
Fax: +1 (860) 945-2213 [email protected]
Central Region
Bristol Babcock Inc.
777 South Central
Expressway
Suite 1-C
Richardson, TX 75080
Phone: +1 (972) 238-8197
Fax: +1 (972) 238-8198 [email protected]
International Affiliates:
Canada
Bristol Babcock, Canada
234 Attwell Drive
Toronto, Ont. M9W 5B3
Canada
PH: 416-675-3820
FAX: 416-674-5129 [email protected]
Mexico
BBI, S.A. de C.V.
Homero No. 1343, 3er Piso
Col. Morales Polanco
11540 Mexico, D.F.
Mexico
PH: (52-55)-52-81-81-12
FAX: (52-55)-52-81-81-09
Rocky Mountain Region
Bristol Babcock Inc.
906 San Juan Blvd., Suite A
Farmington, NM 87401
Phone: +1 (505) 320-5046
Fax: +1 (505) 327-3273
Communications
Technology Group
Bristol Babcock Inc.
317 S. North Lake Blvd.
Suite 1016
Altamonte Springs, FL 32701
Phone: +1 (407) 629-9464
Fax: +1 (407) 629-2106 [email protected]
United Kingdom
Bristol Babcock Ltd.
Blackpole Road
Worcester, WR3 8YB
United Kingdom
PH: +44 (0) 1905 856950
FAX: +44 (0) 1905 856969 [email protected]
Asia Pacific
Bristol Babcock, Inc.
PO Box 1987
Bunbury, Western Australia
6231
PH: +61 (0) 8 9791 3654
FAX: +61 (0) 8 9791 3173 [email protected]
Victoria, Australia
PH: +61 (0) 3 9384 2171
FAX: +61 (0) 3 8660 2501
Calgary Office
Bristol Babcock, Canada
3812 Edmonton Trail N.E.
Calgary, Alberta T2E 5T6
Canada
PH: 403-265-4808
FAX: 403-233-2914 [email protected]
Villahermosa Office
BBI, S.A. de C.V.
Av. Plomo No.2
Bodega No. 1 - Ciudad
Industrial
Villahermosa, Tabasco 86010
Mexico
PH: 52-993-353-3142
FAX: 52-993-353-3145 [email protected]
Middle East
Bristol Babcock Ltd.
Blackpole Road
Worcester, WR3 8YB
United Kingdom
PH: +44 (0) 1905 856950
FAX: +44 (0) 1905 856969 [email protected]
RC Rev: 13-Jun-03
EXPANSION RS-485 and/or
ANALOG OUTPUT BOARD
Series No. 392971-XX-X
(For Models 3530-XXX)
For The Following BBI Instruction Manuals:
CI-3530-10B, CI-3530-15B, CI-3530-20B, CI-3530-25B,
CI-3530-35B, CI-3530-40B & CI-3530-50B
Product Information Package
Bristol Babcock
PIP-EXP485/AO - January 2003
NOTICE
Copyright Notice
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made to supply complete and accurate information. However, Bristol Babcock assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this document.
Request for Additional Instructions
Additional copies of instruction manuals may be ordered from the address below per attention of the Sales Order Processing Department. List the instruction book numbers or give complete model number, serial or software version number. Furnish a return address that includes the name of the person who will receive the material. Billing for extra copies will be according to current pricing schedules.
TeleFlow TM and TeleRTU TM are trademarks of Bristol Babcock. Other trademarks or copyrighted products mentioned in this document are for information only, and belong to their respective companies, or trademark holders.
Copyright (c) 2003 Bristol Babcock, 1100 Buckingham St., Watertown, CT 06795. No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form without the express written permission of
Bristol Babcock.
IMPORTANT! READ INSTRUCTIONS BEFORE STARTING!
Be sure that these instructions are carefully read and understood before any operation is attempted. Improper use of this device in some applications may result in damage or injury. The user is urged to keep this book filed in a convenient location for future reference.
These instructions may not cover all details or variations in equipment or cover every possible situation to be met in connection with installation, operation or maintenance. Should problems arise that are not covered sufficiently in the text, the purchaser is advised to contact Bristol Babcock for further information.
EQUIPMENT APPLICATION WARNING
The customer should note that a failure of this instrument or system, for whatever reason, may leave an operating process without protection. Depending upon the application, this could result in possible damage to property or injury to persons. It is suggested that the purchaser review the need for additional backup equipment or provide alternate means of protection such as alarm devices, output limiting, fail-safe valves, relief valves, emergency shutoffs, emergency switches, etc.
If additional in-formation is required, the purchaser is advised to contact Bristol
Babcock.
RETURNED EQUIPMENT WARNING
When returning any equipment to Bristol Babcock for repairs or evaluation, please note the following: The party sending such materials is responsible to ensure that the materials returned to Bristol Babcock are clean to safe levels, as such levels are defined and/or determined by applicable federal, state and/or local law regulations or codes. Such party agrees to indemnify Bristol Babcock and save Bristol
Babcock harmless from any liability or damage, which Bristol Babcock may incur or suffer due to such party's failure to so act.
ELECTRICAL GROUNDING
Metal enclosures and exposed metal parts of electrical instruments must be grounded in accordance with OSHA rules and regulations pertaining to "Design
Safety Standards for Electrical Systems," 29 CFR, Part 1910, Subpart S, dated: April
16, 1981 (OSHA rulings are in agreement with the National Electrical Code).
The grounding requirement is also applicable to mechanical or pneumatic instruments that include electrically-operated devices such as lights, switches, relays, alarms, or chart drives.
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE FROM ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE VOLTAGE
This product contains sensitive electronic components that can be damaged by exposure to an electrostatic discharge (ESD) voltage. Depending on the magnitude and duration of the ESD, this can result in erratic operation or complete failure of the equipment. Read BBI document S14006 for proper care and handling of ESDsensitive components.
Bristol Babcock 1100 Buckingham Street, Watertown, CT 06795
Telephone (860) 945-2200
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
A.
B.
WARRANTY
Bristol warrants that goods described herein and manufactured by Bristol are free from defects in material and workmanship for one year from the date of shipment unless otherwise agreed to by Bristol in writing.
Bristol warrants that goods repaired by it pursuant to the warranty are free from defects in material and workmanship for a period to the end of the original warranty or ninety (90) days from the date of delivery of repaired goods, whichever is longer.
Warranties on goods sold by, but not manufactured by Bristol are expressly limited to the terms of the warranties given by the manufacturer of such goods.
All warranties are terminated in the event that the goods or systems or any part thereof are (i) misused, abused or otherwise damaged, (ii) repaired, altered or modified without Bristol's consent, (iii) not installed, maintained and operated in strict compliance with instructions furnished by Bristol, or (iv) worn, injured or damaged from abnormal or abusive use in service time.
THESE WARRANTIES ARE EXPRESSLY IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER
WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED (INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION
WARRANTIES AS TO MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE), AND NO WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, NOR ANY
REPRESENTATIONS, PROMISES, OR STATEMENTS HAVE BEEN MADE BY
BRISTOL UNLESS ENDORSED HEREIN IN WRITING. FURTHER, THERE ARE
NO WARRANTIES WHICH EXTEND BEYOND THE DESCRIPTION OF THE
FACE HEREOF.
No agent of Bristol is authorized to assume any liability for it or to make any written or oral warranties beyond those set forth herein.
REMEDIES
Buyer's sole remedy for breach of any warranty is limited exclusively to repair or replacement without cost to Buyer of any goods or parts found by Seller to be defective if Buyer notifies Bristol in writing of the alleged defect within ten (10) days of discovery of the alleged defect and within the warranty period stated above, and if the Buyer returns such goods to Bristol's Watertown office, unless Bristol's Watertown office designates a different location, transportation prepaid, within thirty (30) days of the sending of such notification and which upon examination by Bristol proves to be defective in material and workmanship. Bristol is not responsible for any costs of removal, dismantling or reinstallation of allegedly defective or defective goods. If a Buyer does not wish to ship the product back to Bristol, the Buyer can arrange to have a Bristol service person come to the site. The Service person's transportation time and expenses will be for the account of the Buyer. However, labor for warranty work during normal working hours is not chargeable.
Under no circumstances will Bristol be liable for incidental or consequential damages resulting from breach of any agreement relating to items included in this quotation from use of the information herein or from the purchase or use by Buyer, its employees or other parties of goods sold under said agreement.
How to return material for Repair or Exchange
Before a product can be returned to Bristol Babcock for repair, upgrade, exchange, or to verify proper operation, form (GBU 13.01) must be completed in order to obtain a RA
(Return Authorization) number and thus ensure an optimal lead time. Completing the form is very important since the information permits the Bristol Babcock Repair Dept.to effectively and efficiently process the repair order.
You can easily obtain a RA number by:
A. FAX
Completing the form (GBU 13.01) and faxing it to (860) 945-3875. A BBI Repair
Dept. representative will return call (or other requested method) with a RA number.
B. E-MAIL
Accessing the form (GBU 13.01) via the Bristol Babcock Web site
(www.bristolbabcock.com) and sending it via E-Mail to [email protected]
.
A BBI Repair Dept. representative will return E-Mail (or other requested method) with a RA number.
C. Mail
Mail the form (GBU 13.01) to
Bristol Babcock Inc.
Repair Dept.
1100 Buckingham Street
Watertown, CT 06795
A BBI Repair Dept. representative will return call (or other requested method) with a RA number.
D. Phone
Calling the BBI Repair Department at (860) 945-2442. A BBI Repair Department representative will record a RA number on the form and complete Part I, then send the form to the Customer via fax (or other requested method) for Customer completion of Parts II & III.
A copy of the completed Repair Authorization Form with issued RA number should be included with the product being returned. This will allow us to quickly track, repair, and return your product to you.
Bristol Babcock Inc. Repair Authorization Form
(Providing this information will permit BBI to effectively and efficiently process your return. Completion is required to receive optimal lead time. Lack of information may result in increased lead times.)
Date___________________ RA #___________________SH_ Line No.____________
Standard Repair Practice is as follows: Variations to this is practice may be requested in the “Special Requests” section.
· Evaluate / Test / Verify Discrepancy
· Repair / Replace / etc. in accordance with this form
· Return to Customer
Part I
Please be aware of the
·
Non warranty standard charge:
There is a $100 minimum evaluation charge, which is applied to the repair if applicable ( or D of part III below)
Please complete the following information for single unit or multiple unit returns
Ö in “returned” B,C,
Address No.
Bill to :
(office use only) Address No.
Ship to:
(office use only)
Purchase Order:
Phone: Fax:
Contact Name: ____________________________________
E-Mail:
Part II Please complete Parts II & III for each unit returned
Model No./Part No.
Description
Range/Calibration
Reason for return : Failure Upgrade
S/N
Verify Operation Other
1.
Describe the conditions of the failure (Frequency/Intermittent, Physical Damage, Environmental Conditions,
Communication, CPU watchdog, etc.)
(Attach a separate sheet if necessary)
2. Comm. interface used: Standalone RS-485 Ethernet Modem (PLM (2W or 4W) or SNW) Other: ______________
3. What is the Firmware revision? _____________________ What is the Software &version?
Part III If checking “replaced” for any question below, check an alternate option if replacement is not available
A.
If product is within the warranty time period but is excluded due to BBI’s warranty clause, would you like the product: repaired returned replaced scrapped?
B.
If product were found to exceed the warranty period, would you like the product:
C.
If product is deemed not repairable would you like your product:
D.
If BBI is unable to verify the discrepancy, would you like the product: repaired returned replaced scrapped?
returned replaced scrapped?
returned replaced *see below?
* Continue investigating by contacting the customer to learn more about the problem experienced? The person to contact that has the most knowledge of the problem is: _______________________________ phone
If we are unable to contact this person the backup person is: _________________________ phone
Special Requests:
Ship prepaid to: Bristol Babcock Inc., Repair Dept., 1100 Buckingham Street, Watertown, CT 06795
Phone: 860-945-2442 Fax: 860-945-3875
Form GBU 13.01
Rev. A
Bristol Babcock
Training
GET THE MOST FROM YOUR BRISTOL
BABCOCK INSTRUMENT OR SYSTEM
● Avoid Delays and problems in getting your system on-line
● Minimize installation, start-up and maintenance costs.
● Make the most effective use of our hardware and software.
● Know your system.
As you know, a well-trained staff is essential to your operation. Bristol Babcock offers a full schedule of classes conducted by full-time, professional instructors. Classes are offered throughout the year at four locations: Houston, Birmingham, Orlando and our Watertown,
CT headquarters. By participating in our training, your personnel can learn how to install, calibrate, configure, program and maintain any and all Bristol Babcock products and realize the full potential of your system.
For information or to enroll in any class, contact our training department in Watertown at
(860) 945-2269. For Houston classes, you can also contact our Houston office, at (713) 685-
6200.
A Few Words About Bristol Babcock
For over 100 years, Bristol 7 has been providing innovative solutions for the measurement and control industry. Our product lines range from simple analog chart recorders, to sophisticated digital remote process controllers and flow computers, all the way to turnkey
SCADA systems. Over the years, we have become a leading supplier to the electronic gas measurement, water purification, and wastewater treatment industries.
On off-shore oil platforms, on natural gas pipelines, and maybe even at your local water company, there are Bristol Babcock instruments, controllers, and systems running year-in and year-out to provide accurate and timely data to our customers.
Getting Additional Information
In addition to the information contained in this manual, you may receive additional assistance in using this product from the following sources:
Contacting Bristol Babcock Directly
Bristol Babcock's world headquarters are located at 1100 Buckingham Street, Watertown,
Connecticut 06795, U.S.A.
Our main phone numbers are:
(860) 945-2200
(860) 945-2213 (FAX)
Regular office hours are Monday through Friday, 8:00AM to 4:30PM Eastern Time, excluding holidays and scheduled factory shutdowns. During other hours, callers may leave messages using Bristol's voice mail system.
Telephone Support - Technical Questions
During regular business hours, Bristol Babcock's Application Support Group can provide telephone support for your technical questions.
For technical questions about TeleFlow Ô products call (860) 945-8604.
For technical questions about Control Wave call (860) 945-2244 or (860) 945-2286.
For technical questions regarding Bristol’s OpenEnterprise product, call (860) 945-2501 or e-mail: [email protected]
For technical questions regarding ACCOL products, Open BSI Utilities , as well as
Bristol's Enterprise Server 7 / Enterprise Workstation 7 products, call (860) 945-2286.
For technical questions about Network 3000 hardware, call (860) 945-2502.
You can e-mail the Application Support Group at: [email protected]
The Application Support Group maintains an area on our web site for software updates and technical information. Go to: www.bristolbabcock.com/services/techsupport/
For assistance in interfacing Bristol Babcock hardware to radios, contact Bristol Babcock’s
Communication Technology Group in Orlando, FL at (407) 629-9463 or (407) 629-
9464 .
Telephone Support - Non-Technical Questions, Product Orders, etc.
Questions of a non-technical nature (product orders, literature requests, price and delivery information, etc.) should be directed to the nearest sales office (listed on the rear cover) or to your Bristol-authorized sales representative. A list of
Please call the main Bristol Babcock number (860-945-2200) if you are unsure which office covers your particular area.
Visit our Site on the World Wide Web
For general information about Bristol Babcock and its products, please visit our site on the
World Wide Web at: www.bristolbabcock.com
Training Courses
Bristol Babcock’s Training Department offers a wide variety of courses in Bristol hardware and software at our Watertown, Connecticut headquarters, and at selected Bristol regional offices, throughout the year. Contact our Training Department at (860) 945-2269 for course information, enrollment, pricing, and scheduling.
PIP-EXP485/AO
EXPANSION RS-485 COMMUNICATIONS and/or ANALOG OUTPUT BOARD
PT. Number 392971-XX-X
Product Information Package
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.1
1.1.1
1.1.2
1.2
1.3
1.3.1
SECTION TITLE PAGE #
DESCRIPTION................................................................................................................... 1
Function .............................................................................................................................. 1
Features............................................................................................................................... 2
COMPONENT IDENTIFICATION................................................................................... 3
INSTALLATION COMPATIBILITY................................................................................ 3
Restrictions ......................................................................................................................... 3
2.1
2.1.1
2.1.1.1
2.1.1.2
2.1.1.3
2.2
Section 2 – INSTALLATION & SERVICE
EXP485/AO REMOVAL/REPLACEMENT & INSTALLATION ................................... 4
Installation/Removal of the EXP485/AO Board ................................................................ 4
Installation/Removal for Models 3530-10B, -15B, -40B & -50B ...................................... 4
Installation/Removal for Models 3530-20B & -25B ........................................................ 11
Installation/Removal for Models 3530-35B ..................................................................... 13
RS-485 and AO WIRING ................................................................................................. 14
3.1
3.2
3.3
PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................ 16
ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS ....................................................................... 16
ENTITY PARAMETERS (INTRINSICALLY SAFE EXPAO Bd.) ............................... 17
SUPPLEMENTS
PIP-EXP485/AO Page 0-1 Table Of Contents
Section 1
INTRODUCTION
1.1 DESCRIPTION
1.1.1 Function
The Expansion RS-485 Comm. Port with Analog Output Board (EXP485/AO) provides a single RS-485 communications port to ACCOL-based 3530-XXX models. In addition to assignments of the resident (host) CPU’s “local” and “network” RS-232 ports, any model
3530-XXX unit equipped with a fully populated EXP485/AO Board can establish RS-485 asynchronous communications with other 3530-XXX devices and/or can interface to an
Analog Output circuit. The EXP485/AO Board plugs into the Expansion Connector of the
TeleFlow or TeleRTU CPU Board, is stood-off by three 15/32” long hex standoffs and is secured via three screws or standoffs depending on the model. The CPU Board Expansion
Connector supplies power and 3530-XXX communication to the EXP485/AO Board.
EXP485/AO Boards measure 4.25” by 3.75” and utilizes a 9-position Industrial 3.5mm pitch plugable connector to interface (RS-485) to a series of remote 3530-XXX devices and or a single 1-5Vdc or 4-20mA AO device.
Programmable baud rates up to 19.2Kbps are supported by the EXP485/AO Board.
Interface signals are available at TB1 of the EXP485/AO. When the SLEEP+ & SLEEPsignals (supplied by the Master 3530-XXX) are Low and High respectively, the remote
3530-XXX CPU Boards will be awakened. If no activity is required, the EXP485/AO Board‘s serial communications controller (SCC) chip and RS-485 drivers can be put to sleep (low power mode) along with the host/parent 3530-XXX and the SLEEP+ and SLEEP- signals will be set High and Low respectively.
Figure 1 - EXP485/AO Board (with RS-485 & Configurable AO)
PIP-EXP485/AO Page 1 EXP485/AO Option
Figure 2 - EXPAO Board (with 1-5Vdc AO and without RS-485)
1.1.2 Features
· Low Power
+5Vdc @ 20mA (Max) regulated power and 5.8Vdc to 16Vdc @ 50mA (Max) unregulated power are supplied by the host/parent 3530-XXX via the 40-pin
Expansion Interface Connector P1.
· ESD & Transient Susceptibility
The RS-485 I/O circuitry has been designed to meet the requirements of IEC 801-2 for ESD withstand capability up to 10KV and the requirements of ANSI/IEEE
C37.90.1-1989 (formerly IEE 472) for surge withstand capability.
· EMI Compatibility
EXP485/AO Boards have been designed to coexist inside a shielded enclosure with the TeleFlow ä electronics. EMI radiation is insignificant and susceptibility is comparable or superior to associated electronics.
· Mounting
The EXP485/AO Board measures 3.75” (9.525cm) in width x 4.25” (10.795cm) in height and mounts piggy-back on a TeleFlow or TeleRTU CPU Board.
· RS-485 Comm. Port
EXP485/AO Boards provide an RS-485 communications port that is programmable for asynchronous rates up to 19.2Kbps. 3530-XXX units equipped with the
EXP485/AO Board can communicate with a network of 3530-XXX units (equipped
EXP485/AO Option Page 2 PIP-EXP485/AO
with EXP485/AO Boards), even though a radio or modem may be installed on the
CPU Board’s network port.
1.2 COMPONENT IDENTIFICATION
EXP485/AO Boards do not contain LEDs or switches. Fully populated EXP485/AO Boards
(P/N 392971-01-0) are provided with seven (7) configuration jumpers (see Figures 1 & 11).
Depopulated EXPAO Boards (P/N 392971-02-0) are factory set for 1-5Vdc AO operation and don’t have configuration jumpers (see Figure 2). Two connectors are provided; 40-pin connector P1 mates with the host 3530-XX-X (connector J4 - TeleFlow CPU or J18 - TeleRTU
CPU) and accommodates the TTL interface between the two entities, while 9-pin connector
TB1 mates with the RS-485 device that is being interfaced to the 3530-XXX and/or an analog output device. Additionally, the 3.5mm pitch plugable connector TB1 is removable from its mating EXP485/AO Board socket.
1.3 INSTALLATION COMPATIBILITY
An EXP485/AO Board can be installed into any of the following 3530-XXX models:
3530-10B - TeleFlow
3530-15B - TeleRTU
3530-35B - TeleRTU Module
3530-40B - TeleFlow ECR
3530-20B - TeleFlow Plus 3530-50B - TeleFlow Corrector
3530-25B - TeleRTU Plus
1.3.1 Restrictions
The 3530-XXX in question must be equipped with ACCOL application software. The
TeleFlow Plus (3530-20B), TeleRTU Plus (3530-25B) and the TeleRTU Module (3530-35B) support installation of either a Low Power I/O Expansion Board (LPI/OEB), an
EXPCOM232 Board, or the EXP485/AO Board discussed herein, i.e., YOU CAN ONLY
INSTALL ONE (1) OF THESE ITEMS .
EXP485/AO Board (P/N 392971-01-0) is fully populated and supports RS-485 network communications and interface to either a 1-5Vdc or a 4-20mA analog output device.
P/N 392971-02-0 is a depopulated version of the EXP485/AO Board and only supports interface to a 1-5Vdc analog output device. Connector TB1 has two usable pins (08 = AO and 09 = AOGND). This version is designed for use in a Class I, Division 2, Groups C and D nonincendive environment or a Class I, Division 1, Groups C and D intrinsically safe environment.
Intrinsically safe EXPAO Boards can be installed in 3530-XXX units with 6V Lead Acid or
7.2V Lithium battery systems.
PIP-EXP485/AO Page 3 EXP485/AO Option
Section 2
INSTALLATION & SERVICE
2.1 EXP485/AO REMOVAL/REPLACEMENT & INSTALLATION
2.1.1 Installation/Removal of the EXP485/AO Board
In addition to hardware normally contained within the 3530-XXX in question, units with an installed EXP485/AO Option will contain the following major parts.
1.
Expanded Comm. Port RS-485/AO Board (EXP485/AO)
2.
Three (3) #4-40 x 15/32” Standoffs (Note: Models 3530-10B, -15B, -40B & -50B will also contain Three (3) #4-40 x .188” Standoffs & Two (2) #4-40 x 1/8” SEM Screws)
3.
Modified PC Shield Assembly (for models 3530-10B, -15B, -40B & -50B)
WARNING
Never attempt to service a TeleFlow, TeleFlow ECR, TeleRTU or
TeleFlow Corrector while it is powered and operating in a hazardous environment. Either the area must be made safe or the unit must be powered down, unwired, unmounted, and taken to a safe, nonhazardous area.
WARNING
Never attempt to install or remove any components (PCBs, Field
Wiring, Transducers, etc.) while the unit is powered and running.
Doing so can cause sudden electrical transients or imbalances that are capable of causing damage to the module or component in question, as well as other associated circuit boards. Always turn off the external/internal power source, including any additional supply sources used for externally-powered I/O circuits, before changing or adding any components.
CAUTION
Place any related critical processes under manual or auxiliary control prior to shutting down or performing any of the steps discussed herein.
2.1.1.1 Installation/Removal for Models 3530-10B, -15B, -40B & -50B
To install the optional EXP485/AO Board into a model 3530-10B, -15B, -40B or -50B, follow steps 1 through 14 below. To remove the optional EXP485/AO Board, see step 15. Note: The
Instrument Front Cover must be open.
1.
To open the Instrument Front Cover, remove the lock if present and turn each of the three captive screws a quarter (1/4) turn counterclockwise.
EXP485/AO Option Page 4 PIP-EXP485/AO
Note:
The CPU Board is not to be removed under any circumstances unless the unit has been moved to an ESD safe area (see ESDS Manual - S14006).
2.
Remove the Power Plug(s), Solar Panel Power Plug, and the Auxiliary Power Plug as required, from the CPU Board in question.
3.
Remove the optional radio or modem if installed.
To remove an optional modem :
Disconnect the phone wires. Loosen the four (4) screws that secure the Modem/Radio
Mounting Plate (with modem) to the Battery Mounting Bracket. Slide the modem to the left and remove it and then disconnect the D-Type connector from the modem.
To remove an optional radio :
Disconnect the Radio/TeleFlow Interface Cable from the bottom of the Radio. Unplug the 2-wire power connector associated with the 2-wire Radio Power Interface Cable from the bottom of the Radio. Loosen the four (4) screws that secure the Modem/Radio
Mounting Plate (with radio) to the Battery Mounting Bracket. Slide the radio to the left and remove it.
4.
Remove the Battery(s) (if present).
To remove the battery(s) from units without an optional modem or radio :
Hold the battery securely and remove the Left Battery Mounting Bracket (secured with 2 screws. Loosen the screws which secure the Right Battery Mounting Bracket
(Carefully remove the battery (with wiring harness). Remove the Right Battery
Mounting Bracket.
To remove the battery(s) from units with an optional modem or radio :
Carefully remove the battery (with wiring harness). Note: You may have to loosen the two left 1/4-20 x 3/8” screws that secure the left side of the Battery Mounting Bracket and the Main Mounting Bracket to the rear of the unit.
While holding the Main
Mounting Bracket, remove the four (4) 1/4-20 x 3/8” screws and lock washers that secure the Battery Mounting Bracket and Main Mounting Bracket to the rear of the unit. Remove the Battery Mounting Bracket and temporarily reinstall the four screws to secure the Main Mounting Bracket to the 3530-10B, 15B, -45B or -50B.
5.
Disconnect the Local Port, Network Port, RTD, and Field I/O wires from the CPU
Board connectors by unplugging their associated Terminal Plugs on the front edge of the CPU.
6. Carefully remove the PC Shield which is secured to the Main Mounting Bracket by 2
(#4-40 x 1/4”) screws and to the CPU Board by 2 (#4-40 x 1/4”) screws.
7. Remove the screw (location ‘A’ in Figures 3 & 4) and the two (2) #4-40 x 5/8” Standoffs
(location ‘B’ in Figures 2 & 3) which secure the CPU Board to the Main Mounting
Bracket. Replace these items with the three new #4-40 x 15/32” Standoffs.
Note:
This operation should only be performed in an ESD safe area.
8.
Align the EXP485/AO Board Connector P1 with CPU Board Connector J4 (for 3530-
10B or -50B) or J18 (for 3530-15B). Push the EXP485/AO Board toward the CPU
Board until Connector P1 is fully seated.
PIP-EXP485/AO Page 5 EXP485/AO Option
Figure 3 - TeleFlow CPU Board – Installation Drawing #1
9.
Secure the EXP485/AO Board to the CPU Board by installing three (3) #4-40 x .188”
Standoffs at locations ‘A’ and ‘B’ (see Figures 3 & 4).
10. Carefully install the Modified PC Shield, securing it to the Main Mounting Bracket (at locations ‘C’) with two #4-40 x 1/4” screws and to the CPU Board (at location ‘B’) with two (2) #4-40 x 1/8” SEM screws (see Figures 5, 6, 7 & 8).
11.
Follow steps 2 through 6 in reverse order, replacing rather than removing the item in question.
EXP485/AO Option Page 6 PIP-EXP485/AO
12.
Connect wiring between the EXP485/AO Board and the remote 3530-XXX units to which it is to be interfaced (see Section 2.2).
13.
Configure the new network port in the ACCOL Load resident in the host 3530-XXX device.
Figure 4 - TeleRTU CPU Board – Installation Drawing #1
14.
Close and secure the Instrument Front Cover.
15. To remove an optional EXP485/AO Board, follow steps 1 through 6 (unplug the RS-485 cable during step 5). Remove the PC Shield along with the three Standoffs that secure
PIP-EXP485/AO Page 7 EXP485/AO Option
the EXP485/AO Board to the CPU Board. Then unplug the EXP485/AO Board from the CPU Board in question.
Figure 5 - TeleFlow CPU Board (with EXP485/AO Installed)
Installation Drawing #2
EXP485/AO Option Page 8 PIP-EXP485/AO
Figure 6 - TeleRTU CPU Board (with EXP485/AO Installed)
Installation Drawing #2
PIP-EXP485/AO Page 9 EXP485/AO Option
Figure 7 - 3530-10B, 3530-40B & 3530-50B (with EXP485/AO Installed)
EXP485/AO Option
Figure 8 - 3530-15B (with EXP485/AO Installed)
Page 10 PIP-EXP485/AO
2.1.1.2 Installation/Removal for Models 3530-20B & -25B
To install the optional EXP485/AO Board into a model 3530-20B or 3530-25B, follow steps 1 through 11 below. To remove the optional EXP485/AO Board, perform steps 1 and 2 and then follow steps 4 through 9 in reverse order, removing rather than installing the item in question after the system has been shut down. Note: The Instrument Front Cover must be open.
1.
Open the Instrument Front Cover
2.
Disconnect power by removing harness connector plug (P8 for TeleFlow - P2 for
TeleRTU) from the CPU Board edge connector (J8 for TeleFlow - J2 for TeleRTU).
PIP-EXP485/AO
Figure 9 - 3530-20B CPU (with EXP485/AO Installed)
Page 11 EXP485/AO Option
3.
Unplug the remaining removable Terminal Blocks (with wiring harnesses installed) from the CPU Board’s front edge connectors.
4.
Remove the two screws that secure the CPU Board’s Sliding Mounting Bracket to the
Fixed Bracket on the bottom of the Battery Bracket. Carefully slide the CPU Board
(and optional EXP485/AO Board) toward the front of the unit. Remove harness connections from the Front Panel Switch (J12 on the TeleFlow CPU - J14 on TeleRTU
CPU), the Display Module (J2 on TeleFlow CPU - J16 on TeleRTU CPU), the Wakeup
Switch (J3 on TeleFlow CPU - J16 on TeleRTU CPU), and for TeleFlow CPU Boards connector J1 (associated with the Multivariable Transducer).
Figure 10 - 3530-25B CPU (with EXP485/AO Installed)
5.
Remove the three screws (of five) that secure the CPU Board to the Sliding Mounting
Bracket (locations ‘A’ & ‘B’ in Figures 3 & 4) and replace these items with the three new #4-40 x 15/32” Standoffs.
EXP485/AO Option Page 12 PIP-EXP485/AO
Note:
This operation should only be performed in an ESD safe area.
6.
Align the EXP485/AO Board Connector P1 with CPU Board Connector J4 (for 3530-
20B) or J18 (for 3530-25B). Push the EXP485/AO Board toward the CPU Board until
Connector P1 is fully seated.
7.
Secure the EXP485/AO Board to the CPU Board by installing three (3) #4-40 x 1/4”
SEM screws as illustrated in Figures 9 & 10.
8.
Route the RS-485 and AO cables through a ¾” conduit fitting (user installed) on the bottom of the enclosure.
9.
Connect wiring between the EXP485/AO Board and the remote 3530-XXX units to which it is to be interfaced (see Section 2.2).
10.
Configure the new network port in the ACCOL Load resident in the host 3530-XXX device.
11. Close and secure the Instrument Front Cover.
2.1.1.3 Installation/Removal for Models 3530-35B
To install the optional EXP485/AO Board into a model 3530-35B, follow steps 1 through 8 below. To remove the optional EXP485/AO Board, perform step 1 and then follow steps 5 through 7 in reverse order, removing rather than installing the item in question after the system has been shut down.
1.
Disconnect power by removing harness connector plug P2 from the CPU Board edge connector J2.
2. Unplug the remaining removable Terminal Blocks (with wiring harnesses installed) from the CPU Board’s front edge connectors.
3. Remove harness connections from the Front Panel Switch (J14), the Display Module
(J16) and the Wakeup Switch (J16).
4.
Remove the three screws (of five) that secure the CPU Board to the RTU Mounting
Bracket (locations ‘A’ & ‘B’ in Figures 2 & 3) and replace these items with the three new #4-40 x 15/32” Standoffs.
Note:
This operation should only be performed in an ESD safe area.
5.
Align the EXP485/AO Board Connector P1 with CPU Board Connector J18. Push the
EXP485/AO Board toward the CPU Board until Connector P1 is fully seated.
6.
Secure the EXP485/AO Board to the CPU Board by installing three (3) #4-40 x 1/4”
SEM screws as illustrated in Figure 11.
7.
Connect wiring between the EXP485/AO Board and the remote 3530-XXX units to which it is to be interfaced (see Section 2.2).
PIP-EXP485/AO Page 13 EXP485/AO Option
8.
Configure the new network port in the ACCOL Load resident in the host 3530-XXX device.
Figure 11 - 3530-35B (with EXP485/AO Installed)
2.2 RS-485 and AO WIRING
Figure 12 must be referenced to configure the RS-485 cable. It is recommended that a low capacitance 24-gauge communications grade 2-twisted pair cable such as Belden 9842 be used for RS-485 networking.
EXP485/AO Option Page 14 PIP-EXP485/AO
Figure 12 - EXP485/AO Wiring Diagrams
The device uses compression-type terminals that accommodate up to #14 AWG wire. A connection is made by inserting the bared end (1/4 inch Max.) into the clamp beneath the screw and then securing the screw. Insert the bared end fully to prevent short circuits.
Allow some slack in the wires when making terminal connections. The slack makes the connections more manageable and minimizes mechanical strain on the printed circuit boards and harnesses.
PIP-EXP485/AO Page 15 EXP485/AO Option
Section 3
SPECIFICATIONS
3.1 PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS
Baud Rate (Max.):
Power Requirements:
Transient Protection:
RS-485 Inputs/Outputs:
Analog Output Pins:
Interface Connector:
19.2K Asynchronous
+5Vdc @ 20mA Max. (Regulated)
+5.8Vdc to +16Vdc @ 50mA Max. (Unregulated)
5V Bi-directional Transient Absorption Zeners across all
RS-485 communication points
12V Bi-directional Transient Absorption Zeners across the
AO points (when configured for 1-5Vdc operation)
16V Bi-directional Transient Absorption Zeners across the
AO points (when configured for 4-20mA operation)
TXD/RDX+ (TB1-3)
TXD/RXD- (TB1-4)
SLEEP+ (TB1-5)
SLEEP(TB1-6)
AO (TB1-8) - 1-5Vdc @ 5mA Max. ONLY on
392971-02-0
(TB1-8) - 1-5Vdc @ 5mA Max. or 4-20mA on
392971-01-0
AOGND (TB1-9) - Analog Output Ground/Return
9-Pin Industrial 3.5mm Pitch Plugable Connector
3.2 ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS
Operating Temperature:
Storage Temperature:
Humidity:
Vibration:
RFI Susceptibility:
EMI Compatibility:
-40 ° to +60 ° (C) [-40 ° to 140 ° (F)]
-40 ° to +85 ° (C) [-40 ° to 185 ° (F)]
15% to 90% RH (Non-Condensing)
10 to 500 Hz at 1g on any axis per SAMA PMC-31-1 without damage or impairment.
Meets the requirement of IEC 1000-4-6 level 2 (3V/M) from 150kHz to 80MHz.
Designed to coexist inside a shielded enclosure with the
TeleFlow electronics. EMI radiation is insignificant and
Susceptibility is comparable or superior to associated
Electronics.
EXP485/AO Option Page 16 PIP-EXP485/AO
Surge Susceptibility:
EMI Radiated:
Designed to meet the requirements of ANSI/IEEE
C37.90.1-1989 (Formerly IEEE 472) for surge withstand capability.
Designed to meet the requirements of IEC 1004-4-3 for radiated emissions.
3.3 ENTITY PARAMETERS (INTRISICALLY SAFE EXPAO Bd.)
F1: .125A
R66:
D20/D21:
Voc:
Vmax:
Isc:
Imax:
Ca:
Ci:
La:
Li:
200 Ohms ±5%, .5W
6.2V ±5%
6.51V
15V
34.3mA
150mA
400µF
0µF
80mH
0mH
PIP-EXP485/AO Page 17 EXP485/AO Option
Expansion RS-485 and/or Analog Output Board
Special Instructions for Class I, Division 2 Hazardous Locations
1. The BBI Expansion RS-485 and/or Analog Output (EXP485/AO) Board is listed by
Underwriters Laboratories (UL) as nonincendive and is suitable for use in Class I,
Division 2, Groups C and D hazardous locations or non-hazardous locations only. Read this document carefully before installing a nonincendive BBI Expansion RS-485 and/or
Analog Output Board. In the event of a conflict between the Expansion RS-485 and/or
Analog Output Board User Manual (PIP-EXP485/AO) and this document, always follow the instructions in this document.
2. Wiring must be performed in accordance with Class I, Division 2 wiring methods as defined in Article 501-4 (b) of the National Electrical Code, NFPA 70 for installations within the United States, or as specified in Section 18-152 of the Canadian Electrical
Code for installation in Canada.
3. WARNING: EXPLOSION HAZARD - Substitution of components may impair suitability for use in Class I, Division 2 environments.
4. WARNING: EXPLOSION HAZARD - When situated in a hazardous location, turn off power before servicing/replacing the unit and before installing or removing I/O wiring.
5. WARNING: EXPLOSION HAZARD - Do Not disconnect equipment unless the power has been switched off or the area is known to be nonhazardous.
12/14/2001 Appendix A of PIP-EXP485/AO - EXP485/AO Board Page 1 of 1
Expansion RS-485 and/or Analog Output Board for 3530-XXX
Special Instructions for Class I, Division 1 Hazardous Locations
1.
A version of the Expansion RS-485 and/or Analog Output (EXP485/AO) Board is available that is listed by Underwriters Laboratories (UL) as intrinsically safe for use in
Class I, Division 1, Groups C and D hazardous locations. Read this document carefully before installing an intrinsically safe Expansion RS-485 and/or Analog Output Board.
Refer to the Expansion RS-485 and/or Analog Output Board User’s Manual (PIP-
EXP485/AO) for general information. In the event of a conflict between the Expansion
RS-485 and or Analog Output User’s Manual and this document, always follow the instructions in this document.
2.
Only the depopulated version of the Expansion RS-485 and/or Analog Output Board
(EXP485/AO) (P/N 392971-02-0) may be used in a Class I, Division 1 hazardous location.
3.
TeleFlow models 3530-10B, 3530-40B and 3530-50B approved for use in Class I,
Division 1, Groups C and D hazardous locations and equipped with the EXP485/AO
Board option may reside in a Division 1, 2 or nonhazardous area. 3530-XXX units not approved for use in a Class I, Division 1 environment may contain an EXP485/AO Board but can only reside in a Class I, Division 2 or nonhazardous area.
CAUTION
When connecting the Expansion Analog Output Board to a
TeleFlow that is mounted in a Division 1 area, wire all circuits using wiring methods specified in article 501-4(A) of the
National Electrical Code NFPA 70.
When installing an Expansion RS-485 and/or Analog Output
Board (EXP485/AO) into a TeleFlow that is mounted in a
Division 2 area, ensure that the area is nonhazardous before connecting or disconnecting the nonhazardous interface.
4.
Intrinsically safe TeleFlows equipped with an intrinsically safe EXPAO Board (P/N
392971-02-0) do not include any internal communications options.
01/11/02 Appendix B - Document PIP-EXP485/AO Page 1 of 1
BLANK PAGE
READER RESPONSE FORM
Please help us make our documentation more useful to you! If you have a complaint, a suggestion, or a correction regarding this manual, please tell us by mailing this page with your comments. It's the only way we know we're doing our job by giving you correct, complete, and useful documentation.
DOCUMENT NUMBER: PIP-EXP485/AO
TITLE: EXPANSION RS-485 and/or ANALOG OUTPUT BOARD (for Models 3530-XXX)
Product Information Package
ISSUE DATE: JAN., 2003
COMMENT/COMPLAINT:
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
Mail this page to:
Bristol Babcock Inc.
1100 Buckingham Street
Watertown, CT 06795
Attn: Technical Publications Group, Dept. 315
Bristol Babcock
1100 Buckingham Street
Watertown, CT 06795
Phone: (860) 945-2200
Fax: (860) 945-2213
Website: www.bristolbabcock.com
U.S.A. Locations:
Northern Region
Bristol Babcock Inc.
1100 Buckingham Street
Watertown, CT 06795
Phone: (860) 945-2381
Fax: (860) 945-2525
Southwest Region
Bristol Babcock Inc.
2000 Governor's Circle
Suite F
Houston, TX 77092-8731
Phone: (713) 685-6200
Fax: (713) 681-7331
Western Region
Bristol Babcock Inc.
1609 South Grove Avenue
Suites 106 & 107
Ontario, CA 91761
Phone: (909) 923-8488
Fax: (909) 923-8988
Southeast Region
Bristol Babcock Inc.
317 S. North Lake Blvd.
Suite 1016
Altamonte Springs, FL 32701
Phone: (407) 740-7084
Fax: (407) 629-2106
Helicoid Instruments
1100 Buckingham Street
Watertown, CT 06795
Phone: (860) 945-2218
Fax: (860) 945-2213 [email protected]
Dallas District Office
Bristol Babcock Inc.
777 South Central
Expressway
Suite 1-C
Richardson, TX 75080
Phone: (972) 238-8197
Fax: (972) 238-8198 [email protected]
International Affiliates :
Canada
Bristol Babcock, Canada
234 Attwell Drive
Toronto, Ont. M9W 5B3
Canada
PH: 416-675-3820
FAX: 416-674-5129 [email protected]
Mexico
BBI, S.A. de C.V.
Ejercito Nacional No. 718, 4
Piso
Colonia Polanco
Mexico, D.F. 11560
Mexico
PH: 52-555-254-5281
FAX: 52-555-254-3408
Sales Office New Mexico
Bristol Babcock Inc.
906 San Juan Blvd., Suite A
Farmington, NM 87401
Phone: (505) 320-5046
Fax: (505) 327-3273
Communications
Technology Group
Bristol Babcock Inc.
317 S. North Lake Blvd.
Suite 1016
Altamonte Springs, FL 32701
Phone: (407) 629-9464
Fax: (407) 629-2106 [email protected]
United Kingdom
Bristol Babcock Ltd.
Vale Industrial Estate
Stourport Road
Kidderminster
Worcestershire DY11 7QU
United Kingdom
PH: +44 (0) 1562 820001
FAX: +44 (0) 1562 746721 [email protected]
Australia
Bristol Babcock, Inc.
22 Hastie St.
PO Box 1987
Banbury, Western Australia
6230
PH: 61 (0)8 9791 3654
FAX: 61 (0)8 9791 3173 [email protected]
Calgary Office
Bristol Babcock, Canada
3812 Edmonton Trail N.E.
Calgary, Alberta T2E 5T6
Canada
PH: 403-265-4808
FAX: 403-233-2914 [email protected]
Villahermosa Office
BBI, S.A. de C.V.
Av. Plomo No.2
Bodega No. 1 - Ciudad
Industrial
Villahermosa, Tabasco 86010
Mexico
PH: 52-993-353-3142
FAX: 52-993-353-3145 [email protected]
Middle East
Bristol Babcock Ltd.
Vale Industrial Estate
Stourport Road
Kidderminster
Worcestershire DY11 7QU
United Kingdom
PH: +44 (0) 1562 820001
FAX: +44 (0) 1562 746721 [email protected]
Product Information Package
PIP-EXPTIBTF
Mar., 2007 TeleFlow Series 3530-10B/15B/20B/25B/35B/50B
Expansion Transmitter Interface
Board Part No. 392960-01-0
For The Following Bristol Instruction Manuals:
CI-3530-10B, CI-3530-15B, CI-3530-20B,
CI-3530-25B, CI-3530-35B & CI-3530-50B
www.EmersonProcess.com/Bristol
IMPORTANT! READ INSTRUCTIONS BEFORE STARTING!
Be sure that these instructions are carefully read and understood before any operation is attempted. Improper use of this device in some applications may result in damage or injury. The user is urged to keep this book filed in a convenient location for future reference.
These instructions may not cover all details or variations in equipment or cover every possible situation to be met in connection with installation, operation or maintenance. Should problems arise that are not covered sufficiently in the text, the purchaser is advised to contact Bristol for further information.
EQUIPMENT APPLICATION WARNING
The customer should note that a failure of this instrument or system, for whatever reason, may leave an operating process without protection. Depending upon the application, this could result in possible damage to property or injury to persons.
It is suggested that the purchaser review the need for additional backup equipment or provide alternate means of protection such as alarm devices, output limiting, failsafe valves, relief valves, emergency shutoffs, emergency switches, etc. If additional in-formation is required, the purchaser is advised to contact Bristol .
RETURNED EQUIPMENT WARNING
When returning any equipment to Bristol for repairs or evaluation, please note the following: The party sending such materials is responsible to ensure that the materials returned to Bristol are clean to safe levels, as such levels are defined and/or determined by applicable federal, state and/or local law regulations or codes. Such party agrees to indemnify Bristol and save Bristol harmless from any liability or damage which Bristol may incur or suffer due to such party's failure to so act.
ELECTRICAL GROUNDING
Metal enclosures and exposed metal parts of electrical instruments must be grounded in accordance with OSHA rules and regulations pertaining to "Design
Safety Standards for Electrical Systems," 29 CFR, Part 1910, Subpart S, dated: April
16, 1981 (OSHA rulings are in agreement with the National Electrical Code).
The grounding requirement is also applicable to mechanical or pneumatic instruments that include electrically-operated devices such as lights, switches, relays, alarms, or chart drives.
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE FROM ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE VOLTAGE
This product contains sensitive electronic components that can be damaged by exposure to an electrostatic discharge (ESD) voltage. Depending on the magnitude and duration of the ESD, this can result in erratic operation or complete failure of the equipment. Read supplemental document S14006 at the back of this manual for proper care and handling of ESD-sensitive components.
Bristol 1100 Buckingham Street, Watertown, CT 06795
Telephone (860) 945-2200
WARRANTY
A. Bristol warrants that goods described herein and manufactured by Bristol are free from defects in material and workmanship for one year from the date of shipment unless otherwise agreed to by Bristol in writing.
B. Bristol warrants that goods repaired by it pursuant to the warranty are free from defects in material and workmanship for a period to the end of the original warranty or ninety (90) days from the date of delivery of repaired goods, whichever is longer.
C. Warranties on goods sold by, but not manufactured by Bristol, are expressly limited to the terms of the warranties given by the manufacturer of such goods.
D. All warranties are terminated in the event that the goods or systems or any part thereof are (i) misused, abused or otherwise damaged, (ii) repaired, altered or modified without Bristol's consent, (iii) not installed, maintained and operated in strict compliance with instructions furnished by Bristol, or (iv) worn, injured or damaged from abnormal or abusive use in service time.
E. THESE WARRANTIES ARE EXPRESSLY IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER
WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED (INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION
WARRANTIES AS TO MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE), AND NO WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, NOR ANY
REPRESENTATIONS, PROMISES, OR STATEMENTS HAVE BEEN MADE BY
BRISTOL UNLESS ENDORSED HEREIN IN WRITING. FURTHER, THERE ARE
NO WARRANTIES WHICH EXTEND BEYOND THE DESCRIPTION OF THE
FACE HEREOF.
F. No agent of Bristol is authorized to assume any liability for it or to make any written or oral warranties beyond those set forth herein.
REMEDIES
A. Buyer's sole remedy for breach of any warranty is limited exclusively to repair or replacement without cost to Buyer of any goods or parts found by Seller to be defective if Buyer notifies Bristol in writing of the alleged defect within ten (10) days of discovery of the alleged defect and within the warranty period stated above, and if the Buyer returns such goods to Bristol's Watertown office, unless Bristol's Watertown office designates a different location, transportation prepaid, within thirty (30) days of the sending of such notification and which upon examination by Bristol proves to be defective in material and workmanship. Bristol is not responsible for any costs of removal, dismantling or reinstallation of allegedly defective or defective goods. If a Buyer does not wish to ship the product back to Bristol, the Buyer can arrange to have a Bristol service person come to the site. The Service person's transportation time and expenses will be for the account of the Buyer. However, labor for warranty work during normal working hours is not chargeable.
B. Under no circumstances will Bristol be liable for incidental or consequential damages resulting from breach of any agreement relating to items included in this quotation, from use of the information herein or from the purchase or use by Buyer, its em-ployees or other parties of goods sold under said agreement.
How to return material for Repair or Exchange
Before a product can be returned to Bristol for repair, upgrade, exchange, or to verify proper operation, form (GBU 13.01) must be completed in order to obtain a RA (Return
Authorization) number and thus ensure an optimal lead time. Completing the form is very important since the information permits the Bristol Repair Dept. to effectively and efficiently process the repair order.
You can easily obtain a RA number by:
A. FAX
Completing the form (GBU 13.01) and faxing it to (860) 945-3875. A Bristol Repair
Dept. representative will return call (or other requested method) with a RA number.
B. E-MAIL
Accessing the form (GBU 13.01) via the Bristol Web site (www.bristolbabcock.com) and sending it via E-Mail to [email protected]
. A Bristol Repair Dept. representative will return E-Mail (or other requested method) with a RA number.
C. Mail
Mail the form (GBU 13.01) to
Bristol Inc.
Repair
1100 Buckingham Street
Watertown, CT 06795
A Bristol Repair Dept. representative will return call (or other requested method) with a RA number.
D. Phone
Calling the Bristol Repair Department at (860) 945-2442. A Bristol Repair Department representative will record a RA number on the form and complete Part I, then send the form to the Customer via fax (or other requested method) for Customer completion of Parts II & III.
A copy of the completed Repair Authorization Form with issued RA number should be included with the product being returned. This will allow us to quickly track, repair, and return your product to you.
Bristol
Repair Authorization Form
(off-line completion)
(Providing this information will permit Bristol to effectively and efficiently process your return. Completion is required to receive optimal lead time. Lack of information may result in increased lead times.)
Date___________________ RA #___________________SH
Standard Repair Practice is as follows: Variations to this is practice may be requested in the “Special Requests” section.
•
Evaluate / Test / Verify Discrepancy
•
Repair / Replace / etc. in accordance with this form
•
Return to Customer
Line No.____________
Please be aware of the Non warranty standard charge:
•
There is a $100 minimum evaluation charge, which is applied to the repair if applicable (
√
in “returned”
B,C, or D of part III below)
Part I Please complete the following information for single unit or multiple unit returns
Address No.
Bill to :
Purchase Order:
Phone:
(office use only) Address No.
Ship to:
Fax:
(office use only)
Contact Name: ____________________________________
E-Mail:
Model No./Part No. Description
Range/Calibration S/N
Reason for return : Failure Upgrade Verify Operation Other
1.
Describe the conditions of the failure (Frequency/Intermittent, Physical Damage, Environmental Conditions,
Communication, CPU watchdog, etc.)
(Attach a separate sheet if necessary)
2. Comm. interface used: Standalone RS-485 Ethernet Modem (PLM (2W or 4W) or SNW) Other: ______________
3. What is the Firmware revision? _____________________ What is the Software & version?
Part III If checking “replaced” for any question below, check an alternate option if replacement is not available
A.
If product is within the warranty time period but is excluded due to Bristol’s warranty clause, would you like the product: repaired returned replaced scrapped?
B.
If product were found to exceed the warranty period, would you like the product:
C.
If product is deemed not repairable would you like your product: repaired returned replaced scrapped? returned replaced scrapped?
D.
If Bristol is unable to verify the discrepancy, would you like the product: returned replaced *see below?
* Continue investigating by contacting the customer to learn more about the problem experienced? The person to contact that has the most knowledge of the problem is: ______________________________ phone_____________________
If we are unable to contact this person the backup person is: _________________________ phone_____________________
Special Requests: ____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
Ship prepaid to: Bristol Inc., Repair Dept., 1100 Buckingham Street, Watertown, CT 06795
Phone: 860-945-2442 Fax: 860-945-2220 Form GBU 13.01 Rev. C 04/27/06
Bristol
Training
GET THE MOST FROM YOUR BRISTOL
BABCOCK INSTRUMENT OR SYSTEM
• Avoid Delays and problems in getting your system on-line
• Minimize installation, start-up and maintenance costs.
• Make the most effective use of our hardware and software.
• Know your system.
As you know, a well-trained staff is essential to your operation. Bristol Inc. offers a full schedule of classes conducted by full-time, professional instructors. Classes are offered throughout the year at three locations: Houston, Orlando and our Watertown, CT headquarters. By participating in our training, your personnel can learn how to install, calibrate, configure, program and maintain any and all Bristol products and realize the full potential of your system.
For information or to enroll in any class, contact our training department in Watertown at
(860) 945-2343. For Houston classes, you can also contact our Houston office, at (713) 685-
6200.
A Few Words About Bristol Inc.
For over 100 years, Bristol ® has been providing innovative solutions for the measurement and control industry. Our product lines range from simple analog chart recorders, to sophisticated digital remote process controllers and flow computers, all the way to turnkey
SCADA systems. Over the years, we have become a leading supplier to the electronic gas measurement, water purification, and wastewater treatment industries.
On off-shore oil platforms, on natural gas pipelines, and maybe even at your local water company, there are Bristol Inc. instruments, controllers, and systems running year-in and year-out to provide accurate and timely data to our customers.
Getting Additional Information
In addition to the information contained in this manual, you may receive additional assistance in using this product from the following sources:
Help Files / Release Notes
Many Bristol software products incorporate help screens. In addition, the software typically includes a ‘read me’ release notes file detailing new features in the product, as well as other information which was available too late for inclusion in the manual.
Contacting Bristol Inc. Directly
Bristol's world headquarters is located at 1100 Buckingham Street, Watertown,
Connecticut 06795, U.S.A.
Our main phone numbers are:
(860) 945-2200
(860) 945-2213 (FAX)
Regular office hours are Monday through Friday, 8:00AM to 4:30PM Eastern Time, excluding holidays and scheduled factory shutdowns. During other hours, callers may leave messages using Bristol's voice mail system.
Telephone Support - Technical Questions
During regular business hours, Bristol's Application Support Group can provide telephone support for your technical questions.
For technical questions about TeleFlow products call (860) 945-8604.
For technical questions about Control Wave call (860) 945-2394 or (860) 945-2286.
For technical questions regarding Bristol’s OpenEnterprise product, call (860) 945-3865 or e-mail: [email protected]
For technical questions regarding ACCOL products, OpenBSI Utilities , UOI and all other software except for Control Wave and OpenEnterprise products, call (860) 945-2286.
For technical questions about Network 3000 hardware, call (860) 945-2502.
You can e-mail the Application Support Group at: [email protected]
The Application Support Group maintains an area on our web site for software updates and technical information. Go to: www.bristolbabcock.com/services/techsupport/
For assistance in interfacing Bristol hardware to radios, contact Bristol’s Communication
Technology Group in Orlando, FL at (407) 629-9463 or (407) 629-9464 .
You can e-mail the Communication Technology Group at: [email protected]
Telephone Support - Non-Technical Questions, Product Orders, etc.
Questions of a non-technical nature (product orders, literature requests, price and delivery information, etc.) should be directed to the nearest sales office (listed on the rear cover of this manual) or to your Bristol-authorized sales representative.
Please call the main Bristol Inc. number (860-945-2200) if you are unsure which office covers your particular area.
Visit our Site on the World Wide Web
For general information about Bristol Inc. and its products, please visit our site on the
World Wide Web at: www.bristolbabcock.com
Training Courses
Bristol’s Training Department offers a wide variety of courses in Bristol hardware and software at our Watertown, Connecticut headquarters, and at selected Bristol regional offices, throughout the year. Contact our Training Department at (860) 945-2343 for course information, enrollment, pricing, and scheduling.
PIP-EXPTIBTF
EXPANSION TRANSMITTER INTERFACE
BOARD
PT. Number 392960-01-0
Product Information Package
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION TITLE
1.1 DESCRIPTION .................................................................................................... 1
Operation ........................................................................................ 1
1.2 Features................................................................................................................ 2
1.3 JUMPER
Section 2 – INSTALLATION & SERVICE
REMOVAL/REPLACEMENT & INSTALLATION OF THE ETIB................... 3
Removal/Replacement of the Expansion Transmitter Interface Board ............ 3
2.1
2.1.1
2.1.1.1
2.1.1.2
Installation/Removal for Models 3530-10B, -15B & -50B.................................. 3
Installation/Removal for Models 353-20B & -25B............................................ 10
2.1.1.3 Installation/Removal for Model 3530-35B........................................................ 12
2.2 FIELD
2.2.1.1
2.2.1.2
2.2.1.3
WIRING ................................................................................................. 13
2.2.1 Terminal
Terminal Connections for Model 3808 Transmitters....................................... 14
Terminal Connections for a single Model 3508 Transmitter........................... 14
Trminal Connections for two Model 3508 Transmitters.................................. 15
3.1 GENERAL
SPECIFICATIONS ......................................................... 17
SPECIFICATION ........................................................................... 17
3.2 ENVIRONMENTAL
SUPPLEMENTS
PIP-EXPTIBTF Page 0-1 Table Of Contents
Section 1
1.1 DESCRIPTION
INTRODUCTION
Expansion Transmitter Interface Boards (ETIBs) allow up to two (2) Bristol, Series 3508 or
Series 3808 Transmitters to communicate with an ACCOL loaded host TeleFlow or
TeleFlow Plus Electronic Gas Measurement Computer (EGMC) (3530-10B/20B), a
TeleRTU, TeleRTU Plus or TeleRTU Module (3530-15B/25B/35B) or a TeleFlow Corrector
(3530-50B). The TeleFlow EGMC/RTU/Corrector polls and stores data from each transmitter and communicates with the network.
The ETIB Board interfaced to a TeleFlow/TeleRTU CPU Board via the CPU Board’s
Expansion Connector. Power from and communication with the host CPU Board is supplied through the Expansion Connector. ETIB Boards contain one jumper (JP1) for configuration.
1.1.1 Transmitter Operation
3508 Series
Each Model 3508 Transmitter must be assigned a unique address via the SMARTKIT program as described in Section 4.2 PROGRAM LOADING AND STARTUP of the appropriate 3508 Transmitter manual. Additionally, all Model 3508 Transmitters wired to the TI Board must be operated in the minimum current mode (3.8 mA). This mode is selected via the SMARTKIT program as described in Section 4.7 TRANSMITTER
OPERATING MODES of the appropriate 3508 Transmitter manual, i.e., CI-3508-10C, CI-
3508-30C or CI-3508-99C.
PIP-EXPTIBTF
Figure 1 - Transmitter Interface Board P/N 392960-01-0
Page 1 Expansion TIB Option
3808 MVT Series
Each Model 3808 MVT Transmitter must be assigned a unique address via the WebBSI
Sign On/Off Menu (see Section 3 of Customer Instruction Manual CI-3808). Additionally, only analog versions of the 3808 MVT can be interfaced to a Transmitter Interface Board.
1.1.2 Features
• ESD & Transient Susceptibility
Field connected circuitry has been designed to meet the requirements of IEC 801-2 for ESD withstand capability up to 10KV and the requirements of ANSI/IEEE
C37.90.1-1989 (formerly IEE 472) for surge withstand capability.
• EMI Compatibility
ETIB Boards have been designed to coexist inside a shielded enclosure with the
TeleFlow ™ electronics. EMI radiation is insignificant and susceptibility is comparable or superior to associated electronics.
• Mounting
The ETIB Board measures 3.75” (9.525cm) in width x 4.0” (10.160cm) in height and mounts piggy-back on a TeleFlow or TeleRTU CPU Board.
1.2 JUMPER JP1
Jumper JP1 is used to configure the ETIB for operation with one or two 3508/3808 Transmitters. If only one 3508/3808 Transmitter is to be connected to the ETIB, Jumper JP1 must be installed across JP1-1 and JP1-2. Additionally, when only one 3508/3808
Transmitter is to be connected to the ETIB, it must be connected to connector TB1. When two 3508/3808 Transmitters are connected to the ETIB, Jumper JP1 must be removed and stored in either JP1-1 or JP1-2.
Expansion TIB Option Page 2 PIP-EXPTIBTF
Section 2
INSTALLATION & SERVICE
2.1 REMOVAL/REPLACEMENT & INSTALLATION OF THE ETIB
2.1.1 Removal/Replacement of the Expansion Transmitter Interface Bd.
An installed ETIB option will contain the following parts:
1. Expansion Transmitter Interface Board (ETIB) (with removable Terminal Blocks)
2. Three #4-40 x 15/32” Standoffs (Note: Models 3530-10B, -15B & -50B will also contain
Three (3) #4-40 x .188” Standoffs & Two (2) #4-40 x 1/8” SEM Screws)
3. Modified PC Shield Assembly (for models 3530-10B, -15B & -50B)
WARNING
Never attempt to service a TeleFlow or TeleRTU while it is powered and operating in a hazardous environment.
Either the area must be made safe or the unit must be powered down, unwired, unmounted, and taken to a safe, non-hazardous area.
WARNING
Never attempt to install or remove any components
(PCBs, Field Wiring, Transducers, etc.) while the unit is powered and running. Doing so can cause sudden electrical transients or imbalances that are capable of causing damage to the module or component in question, as well as other associated circuit boards. Always turn off the external/internal power source, including any additional supply sources used for externally-powered
I/O circuits, before changing or adding any components.
CAUTION
Place any related critical processes under manual or auxiliary control prior to shutting down or performing any of the steps discussed herein.
2.1.1.1 Installation/Removal for Models 3530-10B, -15B & -50B
To install the optional ETIB option into a model 3530-10B, -15B or -50B, follow steps 1 through 13 below. To remove the optional ETIB Board, see step 14. Note: The Instrument
Front Cover must be open.
1.
To open the Instrument Front Cover, remove the lock if present and turn each of the three captive screws a quarter (1/4) turn counterclockwise.
PIP-EXPTIBTF Page 3 Expansion TIB Option
Note:
The CPU Board is not to be removed under any circumstances unless the unit has been moved to an ESD safe area (see ESDS Manual - S14006).
2.
Remove the Power Plug(s), Solar Panel Power Plug, and the Auxiliary Power Plug as required, from the CPU Board in question.
3.
Remove the optional radio or modem if installed.
To remove an optional modem :
Disconnect the phone wires. Loosen the four (4) screws that secure the Modem/Radio
Mounting Plate (with modem) to the Battery Mounting Bracket. Slide the modem to the left and remove it and then disconnect the D-Type connector from the modem.
To remove an optional radio :
Disconnect the Radio/TeleFlow Interface Cable from the bottom of the Radio. Unplug the 2-wire power connector associated with the 2-wire Radio Power Interface Cable from the bottom of the Radio. Loosen the four (4) screws that secure the Modem/Radio
Mounting Plate (with radio) to the Battery Mounting Bracket. Slide the radio to the left and remove it.
4.
Remove the Battery(s) (if present).
To remove the battery(s) from units without an optional modem or radio :
Hold the battery securely and remove the Left Battery Mounting Bracket (secured with 2 screws. Loosen the screws which secure the Right Battery Mounting Bracket
(Carefully remove the battery (with wiring harness). Remove the Right Battery
Mounting Bracket.
To remove the battery(s) from units with an optional modem or radio :
Carefully remove the battery (with wiring harness). Note: You may have to loosen the two left 1/4-20 x 3/8” screws that secure the left side of the Battery Mounting Bracket and the Main Mounting Bracket to the rear of the unit.
While holding the Main
Mounting Bracket, remove the four (4) 1/4-20 x 3/8” screws and lock washers that secure the Battery Mounting Bracket and Main Mounting Bracket to the rear of the unit. Remove the Battery Mounting Bracket and temporarily reinstall the four screws to secure the Main Mounting Bracket to the 3530-10B or 3530-15B.
5.
Disconnect the Local Port, Network Port, RTD, and Field I/O wires from the CPU
Board connectors by unplugging their associated Terminal Plugs (front edge of CPU).
6. Carefully remove the PC Shield which is secured to the Main Mounting Bracket by 2
(#4-40 x 1/4”) screws and to the CPU Board by 2 (#4-40 x 1/4”) screws.
7. Remove the screw (location ‘A’ in Figures 2 & 3) and the two (2) #4-40 x 5/8” Standoffs
(location ‘B’ in Figures 2 & 3) which secure the CPU Board to the Main Mounting
Bracket. Replace these items with the three new #4-40 x 15/32” Standoffs.
Note:
This operation should only be performed in an ESD safe area.
8.
Align the ETIB Board Connector P1 with CPU Board Connector J4 (for 3530-10B) or
J18 (for 3530-15B). Push the EXPCOM232 Board toward the CPU Board until
Connector P1 is fully seated.
Expansion TIB Option Page 4 PIP-EXPTIBTF
Figure 2 - TeleFlow CPU Board – Installation Drawing #1
9.
Secure the ETIB Board to the CPU Board by installing three (3) #4-40 x .188”
Standoffs at Locations ‘A’ & ‘B’ (see Figures 2 & 3).
10. Carefully install the Modified PC Shield, securing it to the Main Mounting Bracket (at locations ‘C’) with two (2) #4-40 x 1/4” screws and to the CPU Board (at locations ‘B’) with two (2) #4-40 x 1/8” SEM screws (see Figures 4, 5, 6 & 7).
11. Follow steps 2 through 6 in reverse order, replacing rather than removing the item in question.
PIP-EXPTIBTF Page 5 Expansion TIB Option
12.
Install 3508/3808 Transmitter wiring to the ETIB Board (see Section 2.2.1). Wiring should be routed through a ¾” conduit fitting (user installed) on the bottom of the enclosure.
Figure 3 - TeleRTU CPU Board – Installation Drawing #1
13.
Close and secure the Instrument Front Cover.
14. To remove an optional ETIB Board, follow steps 1 through 6 (unplug the Field Wiring
Terminals during step 5). Remove the PC Shield along with the three Standoffs that
Expansion TIB Option Page 6 PIP-EXPTIBTF
secure the ETIB Board to the CPU Board. Then unplug the ETIB Board from the CPU
Board in question.
PIP-EXPTIBTF
Figure 4 - TeleFlow CPU Board (with ETIB Installed)
Installation Drawing #2
Page 7 Expansion TIB Option
Figure 5 - TeleRTU CPU Board (with ETIB Installed)
Expansion TIB Option
Installation Drawing #2
Page 8 PIP-EXPTIBTF
Figure 6 - 3530-10B & 3530-50B (with ETIB Installed)
PIP-EXPTIBTF
Figure 7 - 3530-15B (with ETIB Installed)
Page 9 Expansion TIB Option
2.1.1.2 Installation/Removal for Models 3530-20B & -25B
To install the optional ETIB Board into a model 3530-20B or 3530-25B, follow steps 1 through 10 below. To remove the optional ETIB Board, perform steps 1 and 2 and then follow steps 4 through 9 in reverse order, removing rather than installing the item in question after the system has been shut down. Note: The Instrument Front Cover must be open.
1.
Open the Instrument Front Cover
2.
Disconnect power by removing harness connector plug (P8 for TeleFlow - P2 for
TeleRTU) from the CPU Board edge connector (J8 for TeleFlow - J2 for TeleRTU).
Expansion TIB Option
Figure 8 - 3530-20B CPU (with ETIB Installed)
Page 10 PIP-EXPTIBTF
3.
Unplug the remaining removable Terminal Blocks (with wiring harnesses installed) from the CPU Board’s front edge connectors.
4.
Remove the two screws that secure the CPU Board’s Sliding Mounting Bracket to the
Fixed Bracket on the bottom of the Battery Bracket. Carefully slide the CPU Board
(and optional ETIB Board) toward the front of the unit. Remove harness connections from the Front Panel Switch (J12 on the TeleFlow CPU - J14 on TeleRTU CPU), the
Display Module (J2 on TeleFlow CPU - J16 on TeleRTU CPU), the Wakeup Switch (J3 on TeleFlow CPU - J16 on TeleRTU CPU), and for TeleFlow CPU Boards connector J1
(associated with the Multivariable Transducer).
Figure 9 - 3530-25B CPU (with ETIB Installed)
5.
Remove the three screws (of five) that secure the CPU Board to the Sliding Mounting
Bracket (locations ‘A’ & ‘B’ in Figures 2 & 3) and replace these items with the three new #4-40 x 15/32” Standoffs.
PIP-EXPTIBTF Page 11 Expansion TIB Option
Note:
This operation should only be performed in an ESD safe area.
6.
Align the ETIB Board Connector P1 with CPU Board Connector J4 (for 3530-20B) or
J18 (for 3530-25B). Push the ETIB Board toward the CPU Board until Connector P1 is fully seated.
7.
Secure the ETIB Board to the CPU Board by installing three (3) #4-40 x 1/4” SEM screws as illustrated in Figures 8 & 9.
8.
Install 3508/3808 Transmitter wiring to the ETIB Board (see Section 2.2.1). Wiring should be routed through a ¾” conduit fitting (user installed) on the bottom of the enclosure.
9. Close and secure the Instrument Front Cover.
2.1.1.3 Installation/Removal for Models 3530-35B
To install the optional ETIB Board into a model 3530-35B, follow steps 1 through 7 below.
To remove the optional ETIB Board, perform step 1 and then follow steps 5 through 7 in reverse order, removing rather than installing the item in question after the system has been shut down.
1.
Disconnect power by removing harness connector plug P2 from the CPU Board edge connector J2.
2. Unplug the remaining removable Terminal Blocks (with wiring harnesses installed) from the CPU Board’s front edge connectors.
3. Remove harness connections from the Front Panel Switch (J14), the Display Module
(J16) and the Wakeup Switch (J16).
4. Remove the three screws (of five) that secure the CPU Board to the RTU Mounting
Bracket (locations ‘A’ & ‘B’ in Figures 2 & 3) and replace these items with the three new #4-40 x 15/32” Standoffs.
Note:
This operation should only be performed in an ESD safe area.
5. Align the ETIB Board Connector P1 with CPU Board Connector J18. Push the ETIB
Board toward the CPU Board until Connector P1 is fully seated.
6.
Secure the ETIB Board to the CPU Board by installing three (3) #4-40 x 1/4” SEM screws as illustrated in Figure 10.
7.
Install 3508/3808 Transmitter wiring to the ETIB Board (see Section 2.2.1).
Expansion TIB Option Page 12 PIP-EXPTIBTF
Figure 10 - 3530-35B (with ETIB Installed)
2.2 FIELD WIRING
The device uses compression-type terminals that accommodate up to #14 AWG wire. A connection is made by inserting the bared end (1/4 inch Max.) into the clamp beneath the screw and then securing the screw. Insert the bared end fully to prevent short circuits.
Allow some slack in the wires when making terminal connections. The slack makes the connections more manageable and minimizes mechanical strain on the printed circuit boards and harnesses.
PIP-EXPTIBTF Page 13 Expansion TIB Option
2.2.1 Terminal Connections
2.2.1.1 Terminal Connections for Model 3808 Transmitters
ETIB Boards contain two terminal blocks that are used to provide field wiring connections to up to two Model 3808 Transmitters. TB1 & TB2 are two-position Terminal Blocks which connect to the signal/power inputs of the Transmitters.
JP1 Note:
If only one Transmitter is connected to the ETIB,
Jumper JP1 must be INSTALLED across JP1-1 & JP1-2.
When two Transmitters are connected to the ETIB,
Jumper JP1 must be REMOVED. Store the Jumper on
Jumper Post JP1-1 or JP1-2.
Note:
When only one Transmitter is connected to the ETIB, it
MUST BE connected to TB1.
Figure 11 - Internally Powered Model 3808 Transmitters - Field Wiring Diagram
ETIB Boards may be connected to up to two internally powered Model 3808 Transmitters.
Connection to internally powered Model 3808 Transmitters (powered from ETIB’s on-board
+12V Supply/Regulator) is illustrated in Figure 11.
2.2.1.2 Terminal Connections for a single Model 3508 Transmitter
The two-position Terminal Block TB1 is utilized to provide field wiring connections to an internally powered Model 3508 Transmitter.
Expansion TIB Option Page 14 PIP-EXPTIBTF
JP1 Note:
Jumper JP1 must be INSTALLED across JP1-1 & JP1-2.
Figure 12 - Internally Powered Model 3508 Transmitter - Field Wiring Diagram
Connection to an internally powered Model 3508 Transmitter (powered from the ETIB’s onboard Supply/Regulator) is illustrated in Figure 12.
2.2.1.3 Terminal Connections for two Model 3508 Transmitters
ETIB Boards contain two terminal blocks that are used to provide field wiring connections for up to two Model 3508 Transmitters. TB1 & TB2 are two-position Terminal Blocks which connect to the signal/power inputs of the Transmitters. When using two Model 3508
Transmitters, an external 21 Volt (dc) power supply must be utilized (see Figure 13).
PIP-EXPTIBTF Page 15 Expansion TIB Option
JP1 Note:
Jumper JP1 must be REMOVED. Store the Jumper on
Jumper Post JP1-1 or JP1-2.
TeleFlow CPU Connector J5-5
TeleRTU CPU Connector J6-2
GND
External 21V
Power Supply
Figure 13 - Externally Powered Model 3508 Transmitters - Field Wiring Diagram
Expansion TIB Option Page 16 PIP-EXPTIBTF
Section 3
SPECIFICATIONS
3.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Communication Interface:
3508/3808 Interface:
ESD Susceptibility:
EMI Compatibility:
RS-232 ( ± 3V minimum)
FSK Modem - Bell 202 Compatible
(1200 Hz/2200 Hz modulation)
Baud rate is 1200
Field connected circuits are designed to meet the requirements of IEC 801-2 for ESD withstand capability up to 10KV.
Designed to coexist within a shielded enclosure with the TeleFlow (3530-10/20B) or the TeleRTU (3530-15B/25B) electronics. EMI radiation is insignificant and susceptibility is comparable or superior to associated electronics.
Transient Susceptibility: Field connected circuits are designed to meet the requirements of ANSI/-
IEEEC37.90-1998 (Formerly IEEE 472) for surge withstand capability.
3.2 ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS
Operating Temperature:
Storage Temperature:
Relative Humidity:
Vibration:
-40°C to +60°C (-40°F to +140°F)
-40°C to +85°C (-40°F to +185°C)
15% - 90% Non-condensing
1G for 10Hz to 500Hz per SAMA PMC-31-1
(without damage or impairment)
PIP-EXPTIBTF Page 17 Expansion TIB Option
Expansion Transmitter Interface Board
Special Instructions for Class I, Division 2 Hazardous Locations
1. The Bristol Expansion Transmitter Interface Board (ETIB) is listed by Underwriters
Laboratories (UL) as nonincendive and is suitable for use in Class I, Division 2, Groups
A, B, C and D hazardous locations or non-hazardous locations only. Read this document carefully before installing a nonincendive Britol ETIB Board. In the event of a conflict between the ETIB Board User Manual (PIP-EXPTIBTF) and this document, always follow the instructions in this document.
2. Wiring must be performed in accordance with Class I, Division 2 wiring methods as defined in Article 501-4 (b) of the National Electrical Code, NFPA 70 for installations within the United States, or as specified in Section 18-152 of the Canadian Electrical
Code for installation in Canada.
3. WARNING: EXPLOSION HAZARD - Substitution of components may impair suitability for use in Class I, Division 2 environments.
4. WARNING: EXPLOSION HAZARD - When situated in a hazardous location, turn off power before servicing/replacing the unit and before installing or removing I/O wiring.
5. WARNING: EXPLOSION HAZARD - Do Not disconnect equipment unless the power has been switched off or the area is known to be nonhazardous.
03/14/2007 Appendix A of PIP-EXPTIBTF - ETIB Board Page 1 of 1
Product Information Package
Expansion Transmitter Interface Board Part No. 392960-01-0
PIP-EXPTIBTF
Mar., 2007
Emerson Process Management
Bristol, Inc.
1100 Buckingham Street
Watertown, CT 06795
Phone: +1 (860) 945-2262
Fax: +1 (860) 945-2525 www.EmersonProcess.com/Bristol
Emerson Electric Canada, Ltd.
Bristol Canada
6338 Viscount Rd.
Mississauga, Ont. L4V 1H3
Canada
Phone: 905-362-0880
Fax: 905-362-0882 www.EmersonProcess.com/Bristol
Emerson Process Management
BBI, S.A. de C.V.
Homero No. 1343, 3er Piso
Col. Morales Polanco
11540 Mexico, D.F.
Mexico
Phone: (52-55)-52-81-81-12
Fax: (52-55)-52-81-81-09 www.EmersonProcess.com/Bristol
Emerson Process Management
Bristol Babcock, Ltd.
Blackpole Road
Worcester, WR3 8YB
United Kingdom
Phone: +44 1905 856950
Fax: +44 1905 856969 www.EmersonProcess.com/Bristol
Emerson Process Management
Bristol, Inc.
22 Portofino Crescent,
Grand Canals Bunbury, Western Australia 6230
Mail to: PO Box 1987 (zip 6231)
Phone: +61 (8) 9725-2355
Fax: +61 (8) 8 9725-2955 www.EmersonProcess.com/Bristol
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made to supply complete and accurate information. However, Bristol, Inc. assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this document.
If you have comments or questions regarding this manual, please direct them to your local Bristol sales representative, or direct them to one of the addresses listed at left.
Bristol, Inc. does not guarantee the accuracy, sufficiency or suitability of the software delivered herewith. The Customer shall inspect and test such software and other materials to his/her satisfaction before using them with important data.
There are no warranties, expressed or implied, including those of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, concerning the software and other materials delivered herewith.
TeleFlow
™
is a trademark of Bristol, Inc. The Emerson logo is a trade mark and service mark of Emerson Electric Co. Other trademarks or copyrighted products mentioned in this document are for information only, and belong to their respective companies, or trademark holders.
Copyright (c) 2007, Bristol, Inc., 1100 Buckingham St., Watertown, CT 06795. No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form without the express written permission of
Bristol, Inc.
Supplement Guide - S1400A
Issue: 04/03
TeleFlow
TM
SITE CONSIDERATIONS
For
EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION,
GROUNDING
&
WIRING
A Guide for the Protection of
Site Equipment & Personnel
In the Installation of
Series 3530-XX-X Instrumentation
Bristol Babcock
NOTICE
Copyright Notice
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made to supply complete and accurate information. However, Bristol Babcock assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this document.
Request for Additional Instructions
Additional copies of instruction manuals may be ordered from the address below per attention of the Sales Order Processing Department. List the instruction book numbers or give complete model number, serial or software version number. Furnish a return address that includes the name of the person who will receive the material. Billing for extra copies will be according to current pricing schedules.
TeleFlow TM and TeleRTU TM are trademarks of Bristol Babcock. Other trademarks or copyrighted products mentioned in this document are for information only, and belong to their respective companies, or trademark holders.
Copyright (c) 2003 Bristol Babcock, 1100 Buckingham St., Watertown, CT 06795. No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form without the express written permission of
Bristol Babcock.
Supplement Guide S1400A
SITE CONSIDERATIONS FOR EQUIPMENT
INSTALLATION, GROUNDING & WIRING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
4.1
4.1.1
4.1.2
4.1.3
4.1.4
4.1.5
4.2
3.1
3.1.1
3.2
3.3
3.3.1
3.3.1.1
3.3.1.2
3.3.1.3
3.3.2
3.3.2.1
3.3.3
3.4
3.4.1
3.4.2
SECTION TITLE
1.1
1.2
2.1
2.1.1
2.2
2.2.1
2.2.2
2.3
PAGE #
GENERAL INTRODUCTION .......................................................................................1-1
MAJOR TOPICS.............................................................................................................1-1
PROTECTING INSTRUMENT SYSTEMS...................................................................2-1
Quality Is Conformance To Requirements....................................................................2-1
PROTECTING EQUIPMENT & PERSONNEL ...........................................................2-1
Considerations For The Protection of Personnel.......................................................... 2-2
Considerations For The Protection of Equipment........................................................2-2
OTHER SITE SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS...............................................................2-3
Section 3 - GROUNDING & ISOLATION
POWER & GROUND SYSTEMS...................................................................................3-1
Modem Grounding Kit 621495-01-8. ............................................................................. 3-1
IMPORTANCE OF GOOD GROUNDS.........................................................................3-2
EARTH GROUND CONNECTIONS.............................................................................3-2
Establishing a Good Earth Ground. ..............................................................................3-2
Soil Conditions................................................................................................................3-3
Soil Types ........................................................................................................................3-3
Dry, Sandy or Rocky Soil................................................................................................3-5
Ground Wire Considerations. ........................................................................................3-6
Modem Ground Wiring Diagrams .................................................................................3-7
Other Grounding Considerations. ...............................................................................3-20
ISOLATING EQUIPMENT FROM THE PIPELINE .................................................3-21
Meter Runs Without Cathodic Protection...................................................................3-21
Meter Runs With Cathodic Protection ........................................................................3-22
Section 4 - LIGHTNING ARRESTERS & SURGE PROTECTORS
STROKES & STRIKES ..................................................................................................4-1
Chance of Being Struck by Lightning. ..........................................................................4-1
Antenna Caution ............................................................................................................4-3
Ground Propagation .......................................................................................................4-5
Tying it all Together.......................................................................................................4-5
Impulse Protection Summary ........................................................................................4-5
USE OF LIGHTNING ARRESTERS & SURGE PROTECTORS................................4-6
Supplement S1400A Page 0-1 Table Of Contents
Supplement Guide S1400A
SITE CONSIDERATIONS FOR EQUIPMENT
INSTALLATION, GROUNDING & WIRING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
5.1
5.2
5.2.1
5.2.2
5.2.3
5.2.4
5.2.5
5.2.6
5.2.7
5.2.8
5.2.9
5.2.10
SECTION TITLE PAGE #
OVERVIEW ....................................................................................................................5-1
INSTRUMENT WIRING. ..............................................................................................5-1
Common Returns............................................................................................................5-1
Use of Twisted Shielded Pair Wiring (with Overall Insulation)..................................5-2
Grounding of Cable Shields. ..........................................................................................5-3
Use of Known Good Earth Grounds ..............................................................................5-3
Earth Ground Wires .......................................................................................................5-3
Working Neatly & Professionally ..................................................................................5-3
High Power Conductors and Signal Wiring ..................................................................5-4
Use of Proper Wire Size ................................................................................................. 5-4
Lightning Arresters & Surge Protectors .......................................................................5-4
Secure Wiring Connections............................................................................................5-5
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
1. IEEE Recommended Practice for Grounding of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems - ANSI/IEEE Std
142-1982
2. IEEE Guide for the Installation of Electrical Equipment to Minimize Electrical Noise inputs to Controllers from External Sources - IEE Std 518-1982
3.
Lightning Strike Protect; Roy B. Carpenter, Jr. & Mark N. Drabkin, Ph.D.; Lightning Eliminators &
Consultant, Inc., 6687 Arapahoe Road, Boulder Colorado
4.
Lightning Protection Manual for Rural Electric Systems, NRECA Research Project 82-5, Washington DC,
1983
5.
Grounding for the Control of EMI; Hugh W. Denny; Don White Consultants, Inc., 1983, 1 st Edition
6.
Fundamentals of EGM - Electrical Installations; Michael D. Price; NorAm Gas Transmission, 525 Milam
Street, Shreveport, Louisiana 71151
7.
TeleFlow Modem Grounding Kit 621495-01-8 Installation Instructions - PIP-3530MGKI; Bristol Babcock,
Watertown, CT 06795
Supplement S1400A Page 0-2 Table Of Contents
Section 1 - Overview
1.1 INTRODUCTION
This document provides information pertaining to the installation of TeleFlow systems; more specifically, information covering reasons, theory and techniques for protecting your personnel and equipment from electrical damage. Your instrument system affects the quality of service provided by your company and many aspects of its operational safety.
Loss of instruments means lost production and profits as well as increased expenses.
Information contained in this document is for educational purposes. Bristol Babcock makes no warranties or guarantees on the effectiveness or the safety of techniques described herein.
Where the safety of installations and personnel is concerned, refer to the National Electrical
Code Rules and rules of local regulatory agencies.
1.2
MAJOR TOPICS
Topics are covered in seven sections designed to pinpoint major areas of concern for the protection of site equipment and personnel. The following overview is provided for each of the major sections.
· Section 2 - Protection
This section provides the reasons for protecting instrument systems. An overview of the definition of quality and what we are trying to accomplish in the protection of site installations and how to satisfy the defined requirements is presented. Additionally, this section provides considerations for the protection of personnel and equipment.
· Section 3 - Grounding & Isolation
Construction of the TeleFlow with respect to grounds, isolation and electrical considerations is discussed. Information pertaining to what constitutes a good earth ground, how to test and establish such grounds, as well as when and how to connect equipment to earth grounds is provided
· Section 4 - Lightning Arresters & Surge Protectors
Some interesting information dealing with Lightning strikes and strokes is presented in technical and statistical form along with a discussion of how to determine the likelyhood of a lightning strike.
Protecting equipment and personnel during the installation of radios and antenna is discussed in a review of the dangers to equipment and personnel when working with antennas. Reasons for the use of lightning arresters and surge protectors are presented along with overviews of how each device protects site equipment.
· Section 5 - Wiring Techniques
Installation of Power and “Measurement & Control” wiring is discussed. Information on obscure problems, circulating ground and power loops, bad relays, etc. is presented.
Good wire preparation and connection techniques along with problems to avoid are discussed. This sections list the ten rules of instrument wiring.”
Section 1 - Overview Page 1-1 S1400A
Section 2 - Protection
2.1 PROTECTING INSTRUMENT SYSTEMS
Electrical instrumentation is susceptible to damage from a variety of natural and man made phenomena. In addition to wind, rain and fire, the most common types of system and equipment damaging phenomena are lightning, power faults, communication surges & noise and other electrical interference’s caused by devices such as radios, welders, switching gear, automobiles, etc. Additionally there are problems induced by geophysical electrical potential & noise plus things that are often beyond our wildest imagination.
2.1.1 Quality Is Conformance To Requirements
A quality instrumentation system is one that works reliably, safely and as purported by the equipment manufacturer (and in some cases by the system integrator) as a result of good equipment design and well defined and followed installation practices. If we except the general definition of quality to be, “quality is conformance to requirements,” we must also except the premise that a condition of “quality” can’t exist where requirements for such an end have not been evolved. In other words, you can’t have quality unless you have requirements that have been followed. By understanding the requirements for a safe, sound and reliable instrumentation system, and by following good installation practices (as associated with the personnel and equipment in question), the operational integrity of the equipment and system will be enhanced.
Understanding what is required to properly install BBI equipment in various environments, safely, and in accordance with good grounding, isolating and equipment protection practices goes a long way toward maintaining a system which is healthy to the owner and customer alike. Properly installed equipment is easier to maintain and operate, and is more efficient and as such more profitable to our customers. Following good installation practices will minimize injury, equipment failure and the customer frustrations that accompany failing and poorly operating equipment (of even the finest design). Additionally, personnel involved in the installation of a piece of equipment add to or subtract from the reliability of a system by a degree which is commensurate with their technical prowess, i.e., their understanding of the equipment, site conditions and the requirements for a quality installation.
2.2
PROTECTING EQUIPMENT & PERSONNEL
TeleFlow installations must be performed in accordance with National Electrical Code
Rules, electrical rules set by local regulatory agencies, and depending on the customer environment (gas, water, etc), other national, state and local agencies such as the American
Water Works Association (AWWA). Additionally, installation at various customer sites may be performed in conjunction with a “safety manager” or utility personnel with HAZMAT
(hazardous material) training on materials present (or potentially present) as required by
OSHA, the customer, etc.
Section 2 - Protection Page 2-1 S1400A
2.2.1
Considerations For The Protection of Personnel
Always evaluate the site environment as if your life depended on it. Make sure that you understand the physical nature of the location where you will be working. Table 2-1 provides a general guideline for evaluating an installation site.
Table 2-1 - Installation Site Safety Evaluation Guide
#
1 Indoor or outdoor – Dress Appropriately
Guide
2 If outdoor, what kind of environment, terrain, etc. Watch out for local varmint (bees, spiders, snakes, etc.)
3 If indoor or outdoor – determine if there are any pieces of dangerous equipment or any processes which might be a risk to your safety
4 If in a tunnel, bunker, etc. watch out for a build up of toxic or flammable gases. Make sure the air is good. Watch out for local varmint (bees, spiders, snakes, etc.)
5 Hazardous or Non-Hazardous Environment – Wear appropriate safety equipment and perform all necessary safety measures.
6 Before installing any equipment or power or ground wiring, make sure that there are no lethal (life threatening) voltages between the site where the instrument will be installed and other equipment, pipes, cabinets, etc. or to earth itself.
7 Never assume that adjacent or peripheral equipment has been properly installed and grounded. Determine if this equipment and a TeleFlow can be touched simultaneously without hazard to personnel and/or equipment?
8 Before embarking to remote locations where there are few or no human inhabitants ask a few simple questions like, should I bring water, food, hygienic materials, first aid kit, etc?
Be Prepared!
9 Observe the work habits of those around you – for your own safety!
Some of the items that a service person should consider before ever going on site can be ascertained by simply asking questions of the appropriate individual. Obviously other safety considerations can only be established at the installation site.
2.2.2
Considerations For The Protection of Equipment
Always evaluate the site installation/service environment and equipment. Understand the various physical interfaces you will be dealing with such as TeleFlow mounting and supporting, transducer mechanical and electrical connections, TeleFlow analog and digital circuits, power circuits, communication circuits and various electrical grounds. Table 2-2 provides a general guideline for evaluating the equipment protection requirements of an installation site.
Table 2-2 – Equipment Protection Site Safety Evaluation Guide
# Guide
1 Environment - Class I, Division 2 - Nonincendive
Environment - Class I, Division 1 - Intrinsically Safe
Other – Safe or unrated area
2 Earth Ground - Established by mechanical/electrical or
(both) or not at all.
3 Is the area prone to lightning strikes?
4 Are there surge suppressors installed or to be installed?
5 Are there overhead or underground power or communication cables in the immediate area?
Reference Section
See Appendix A of CI-3530-XX-X
See Appendix B of CI-3530-XX-X
See Section 3
See Section 4
See Section 4
See Section 2.3
S1400A Page 2-2 Section 2 - Protection
Table 2-2 –Equipment Protection Site Safety Evaluation Guide (Continued)
# Guide
6 Is there an antenna in the immediate area?
7 If pipe mounted, is a cathodic charge present on the pipe? Should the
TeleFlow be isolated?
8 How close is other equipment? Can someone safely touch this equipment and a TeleFlow simultaneously?
9 Determine equipment ground requirements. How will the TeleFlow and its related wiring be grounded? Consider Earth Ground, Circuit
Ground, Conduit Ground, Site Grounds, Manifold grounded or not?
10 Are there any obviously faulty or questionable power or ground circuits?
Reference Section
See Section 4.1.2
See Section 3.4
See Section 2.3
See Section 3
See Section 2.3
2.3
OTHER SITE SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS
Overhead or underground power or communication cables must be identified prior to installing a new unit. Accidentally cutting, shorting or simply just contacting power, ground, communication or process control I/O wiring can have potentially devastating effects on site equipment, the process system and or personnel.
Don’t assume that it is safe to touch adjacent equipment, machinery, pipes, cabinets or even the earth itself. Adjacent equipment may not have been properly wired or grounded, may be defective or may have one or more loose system grounds. Measure between the case of a questionable piece of equipment and its earth ground for voltage. If a voltage is present, something is wrong.
AC powered equipment with a conductive case should have the case grounded. If you don’t see a chassis ground wire, don’t assume that it is safe to touch this equipment. If you notice that equipment has been grounded to pipes, conduit, structural steel, etc., you should be leery. Note: AWWA’s policy on grounding of electric circuits on water pipes states,
“The American Water Works Association (AWWA) opposes the grounding of electrical systems to pipe systems conveying water to the customer’s premises….”
Be sure that the voltage between any two points in the instrument system is less than the stand-off voltage. Exceeding the stand-off voltage will cause damage to the instrument and will cause the instrument to fail.
Section 2 - Protection Page 2-3 S1400A
Section 3 - Grounding & Isolation
3.1 POWER & GROUND SYSTEMS
TeleFlow GFCs, TeleFlow ECRs, TeleFlow Correctors, TeleRTUs and TeleRecorders are similar in that they all have basically two system grounds, i.e., Chassis Gnd and
CPU/Circuit Ground. Chassis Ground is galvanically isolated from CPU/Circuit Ground by
500V (ac/dc). A jumper on the CPU Board would (if installed) place these two ground systems at the same potential and thus eliminate the 500V galvanic isolation. Installation of this jumper is not recommended. CPU/Circuit Ground consists of Power, Analog, Digital, and Comm. Grounds (all common).
Teleflows are DC (+6V or +12V) systems. AC power supplies are not provided with
TeleFlows. The TeleFlow’s Electronics are galvanically isolated from the case and should not be affected by cathodic protection or other EMF on the pipeline. Grounding to the pipeline, i.e., completing a connection between the 3530-XXX Ground Lug and the mounting media (valve, manifold, pipeline, etc.) is not recommended even if the media in question is earth grounded. When grounding a TeleFlow, always connect directly to a known good Earth Ground.
NOTE
Never connect the CPU Board’s Ground Lug to Earth Ground. The
CPU Board’s CPU/Circuit Ground must always be isolated from the case. The TeleFlow/TeleRTU/TeleRecorder case is to be connected to
Earth Ground.
NOTE
Some 3530-20Bs and 3530-25Bs have been factory shipped with the
Cabinet Ground Cable connected to the CPU Board’s Ground Ring.
Remove this ground connection from the CPU Board. This cable should be removed (or electrically isolated) if a modem is not present. If a modem is present, the Cabinet Ground Cable should be connected to the modem.
3.1.1 Modem Grounding Kit 621495-01-8
Some TeleFlows (3530-10B), TeleRTUs (3530-15B), TeleRecorders (3530-45B) and TeleFlow
Correctors (3530-50B) have been shipped without a system Ground Lug. These units must be modified before they can be properly connected to earth ground. Product Information
Package PIP-3530-MGKI provides the information required to properly install the TeleFlow
Modem Grounding Kit (621495-01-8). This kit may also be used to support a TeleRTU
Module (3530-35B).
The TeleFlow Modem Grounding Kit consists of the following items: i Hex Nut - #10-32 i Cabinet Ground Cable i Self-Locking Nut - #10-32 UNF i Flat Washer - #10 i Ground Lug
Section 3 - Grounding & Isolation Page 3-1 S1400A
i Pan Head Screw - #10-32 x 3/4”) i Pan Head Screw - - #4-40 x 3/8” i Self-Locking Nut - #4-40 UNC i Hex Nut - #4-40
3.2 IMPORTANCE OF GOOD GROUNDS
Model 3530-XXXs are utilized in instrument and control systems that must operate continually and within their stated accuracy over long periods of time with minimum attention. Since many system sites are unmanned and located in remote areas, failures resulting from an improperly grounded system can become costly in terms of lost time and disrupted processes. A properly grounded system will help prevent electrical shock hazards resulting from contact with live metal surfaces, provide additional protection of equipment from lightning strikes and power surges, minimize the effects of electrical noise and power transients, and reduce signal errors caused by ground wiring loops. Conversely, an improperly grounded system may exhibit a host of problems that appear to have no relationship to grounding. It is essential that the reader (service technician) have a good understanding of this subject to prevent needless troubleshooting procedures.
WARNING
This device must be installed in accordance with the National
Electrical Code (NEC) ANSI/NEPA-70. Installation in hazardous locations must also comply with Article 500 of the code. For information on the usage of Model 3530-XXX units in Class I, Division
2, Groups C & D Hazardous and Nonhazardous locations, see appendix A of the applicable CI-3530-XXX manual. For information on the usage of Models 3530-10B, 3530-40B & 3530-50B in Class I,
Division 1, Groups C & D Hazardous locations, see appendix B of CI-
3530-10B, CI-3530-40B or CI-3530-50B.
3.3
EARTH GROUND CONNECTIONS
To properly ground a TeleFlow (3530-10B/20B/40B), TeleRTU (3530-15B/25B),
TeleRecorder (3530-45B/55B) or TeleFlow Corrector (3530-50B), connect the Earth Ground wire between the Ground Lug on the bottom of the case and a known good Earth Ground.
Observe recommendations provided in topics Establishing a Good Earth Ground and
Ground Wire Considerations. Note: In the case of the TeleRecorder (3530-55B), connection to a known good Earth Ground is only required when a BBI 9600 PSTN modem is installed.
3.3.1 Establishing a Good Earth Ground
A common misconception of a ground is that it consists of nothing more than a metal pipe driven into the soil. While such a ground may function for some applications, it will often not be suitable for a complex system of sophisticated electronic equipment. Conditions such as soil type, composition and moisture will all have a bearing on ground reliability.
A basic ground consists of a 3/4-inch diameter rod with a minimum 8-foot length driven into conductive earth to a depth of about 7-feet as shown in Figure 3-1. Number 3 or 4 AWG solid copper wire should be used for the ground wire. The end of the wire should be clean,
S1400A Page 3-2 Section 3 - Grounding & Isolation
free of any coating and fastened to the rod with a clamp. This ground connection should be covered or coated to protect it from the weather and the environment.
Figure 3-1 - Basic Ground Rod Installation
3.3.1.1 Soil Conditions
Before installing a ground rod, the soil type and moisture content should be analyzed.
Ideally, the soil should be moist and moderately packed throughout to the depth of the ground rod. However, some soils will exhibit less than ideal conditions and will require extra attention.
Soil types can be placed into two general categories with respect to establishing and maintaining a good earth ground, i.e., ‘Good Soil’ and ‘Poor Soil.’
To be a good conductor, soil must contain some moisture and free ions (from salts in the soil). In very rainy areas, the salts may be washed out of the soil. In very sandy or arid area the soil may be to dry and/or salt free to a good conductor. If salt is lacking add rock salt
(NaCl); if the soil is dry add calcium chloride (CaCl
2
).
3.3.1.2 Soil Types: Good
Damp Loam
Salty Soil or Sand
Farm Land
Poor
Back Fill
Dry Soil
Sand Washed by a Lot of Rain
Dry Sand (Desert)
Rocky Soil
Ground Beds must always be tested for conductivity prior to being placed into service. A brief description of ground bed testing in ‘Good Soil’ and ‘Poor Soil’ is provided herein.
Details on this test are described in the National Electrical Code Handbook. Once a reliable
Section 3 - Grounding & Isolation Page 3-3 S1400A
ground has been established, it should be tested on a regular basis to preserve system integrity.
Figure 3-2 - Basic Ground Bed Soil Test Setup
Figure 3-3 - Basic Ground Bed Soil Test Setup with Additional Ground Rods
Figure 3-2 shows the test setup for ‘Good Soil’ conditions. If the Megger* reads less than 5 ohms, the ground is good. The lower the resistance, the better the earth ground. If the
S1400A Page 3-4 Section 3 - Grounding & Isolation
Megger reads more than 10 ohms, the ground is considered ‘poor.’ If a poor ground is indicated, one or more additional ground rods connected 10 feet from the main ground rod should be driven into the soil and interconnected via bare AWG 0000 copper wire and 1” x
¼-20 cable clamps as illustrated in Figure 3-3). * Note: Megger is a Trademark of the
Biddle Instrument Co. (now owned by AVO International). Other devices that may be used to test ground resistance are “Viboground”; Associated Research,
Inc., “Groundmeter”; Industrial Instruments, Inc., and “Ground-ohmer”; Herman
H. Sticht Co., Inc.
If the Megger still reads more than 10 ohms, mix a generous amount of cooking salt, ice cream salt or rock salt with water and then pour about 2.5 to 5 gallons of this solution around each rod (including the test rods). Wait 15 minutes and re-test the soil. If the test fails, the soil is poor and a ‘Poor Soil Ground Bed’ will have to be constructed.
Figure 3-4 shows a typical Poor Soil Ground Bed Electrode. A Poor Soil Ground Bed will typically consists of four or more 10-foot long electrodes stacked vertically and separated by earth. Figure 3-5 shows the construction of a Poor Soil Ground Bed. For some poor soil sites, the ground bed will be constructed of many layers of ‘Capacitive Couplings’ as illustrated. In extremely poor soil sites one or more 3’ by 3’ copper plates (12 gauge or 1/16” thick) will have to be buried in place of the electrodes.
Figure 3-4 - Ground Electrode Construction for Poor Soil Conditions
3.3.1.3 Dry, Sandy or Rocky Soil
Very dry soil will not provide enough free ions for good conductance and a single ground rod will not be effective. A buried counterpoise or copper screen is recommended for these situations. It will be necessary to keep the soil moist through regular applications of water.
Sandy soil, either wet or dry, may have had its soluble salts leached out by rain water, thereby reducing conductivity of the ground. High currents from lightning strikes could also melt sand and cause glass to form around the ground rod, rendering it ineffective. A buried counterpoise or copper screen is preferred for these installations along with regular applications of salt water.
Rocky soil can pose many grounding problems. A counterpoise or copper plate will probably be required. Constructing a trench at the grounding site and mixing the fill with a hygroscopic salt such as calcium chloride may help for a time. Soaking the trench with water on a regular basis will maintain conductivity.
Any TeleFlow, TeleRTU, TeleRecorder or TeleFlow Corrector, may be connected to Earth
Ground via its Ground Lug; however, units equipped with a BBI 9600 bps PSTN modem must be connected to Earth Ground. Units with phone modems require the use of a
Section 3 - Grounding & Isolation Page 3-5 S1400A
lightning arrestor. The lightning arrestor must be situated at the point where the communication line enters the building.
Figure 3-5 - Poor Soil Ground Bed Construction Diagram
3.3.2 Ground Wire Considerations i Ground wire size should be AWG 4. It is recommended that stranded copper wire is used for this application and that the length should be as short as possible.
i This ground wire should be clamped or brazed to the Ground Bed Conductor (that is typically a stranded copper AWG 0000 cable installed vertically or horizontally).
i The wire ends should be tinned with solder prior to insertion into the TeleFlow
Ground Lug.
i The ground wire should be run such that any routing bend in the cable has a minimum radius of 12-inches below ground and 8-inches above ground.
S1400A Page 3-6 Section 3 - Grounding & Isolation
3.3.2.1 Modem Ground Wiring Diagrams
Figure 3-6A/B - TeleFlow Modem Ground Wiring - for 3530-10B, -15B, 45B & -50B
Figure 3-7A/B - TeleFlow/TeleRTU Plus Modem Ground Wiring - for 3530-20B & -25B
Figure 3-8A/B - TeleFlow Plus Modem Ground Wiring - for 3530-20B
Figure 3-9A/B - TeleRTU Plus Modem Ground Wiring - for 3530-25B
Figure 3-10A/B - TeleFlow/Corrector/TeleRTU Modem Ground Wiring (Side View)
Figure 3-11A/B - TeleRecorder (3530-45B) Modem Ground Wiring (Front View)
Figure 3-12
Figure 3-13
- TeleRecorder (3530-55B) Modem Ground Wiring (Front View)
- Earth Grounding Of TeleFlow Modem & Case
Figure 3-6A - TeleFlow Modem (396039-02-2) Ground Wiring
Section 3 - Grounding & Isolation Page 3-7 S1400A
S1400A
Figure 3-6B - TeleFlow Modem (400000-01-6) Ground Wiring
Page 3-8 Section 3 - Grounding & Isolation
Figure 3-7A - TeleFlow/TeleRTU Plus Modem (396039-02-2)
Ground Wiring
(Side View)
Section 3 - Grounding & Isolation Page 3-9 S1400A
S1400A
Figure 3-7B - TeleFlow/TeleRTU Plus Modem (400000-01-6)
Ground Wiring
(Side View)
Page 3-10 Section 3 - Grounding & Isolation
Figure 3-8A - TeleFlow Plus Modem (396039-02-2) Ground Wiring
(Front View)
Section 3 - Grounding & Isolation Page 3-11 S1400A
S1400A
Figure 3-8B - TeleFlow Plus Modem (400000-01-6) Ground Wiring
(Front View)
Page 3-12 Section 3 - Grounding & Isolation
Figure 3-9A - TeleRTU Plus Modem (396039-02-2)
Ground Wiring
(Front View)
Section 3 - Grounding & Isolation Page 3-13 S1400A
S1400A
Figure 3-9B - TeleRTU Plus Modem (400000-01-6)
Ground Wiring
(Front View)
Page 3-14 Section 3 - Grounding & Isolation
Figure 3-10A - 3530-10B/15B/50B Modem (396039-02-2) Ground Wiring (Side View)
Figure 3-10B - 3530-10B/15B/50B Modem (400000-01-6) Ground Wiring (Side View)
Section 3 - Grounding & Isolation Page 3-15 S1400A
Figure 3-11A - 3530-45B Modem (396039-02-2) Ground Wiring (Front View)
S1400A Page 3-16 Section 3 - Grounding & Isolation
Figure 3-11B - 3530-45B Modem (400000-01-6) Ground Wiring
(Front View)
Section 3 - Grounding & Isolation Page 3-17 S1400A
Figure 3-12 - 3530-55B Modem (400000-01-6) Ground Wiring
(Front View)
Figure 3-13 shows a model 3530-10B (TeleFlow) installation. An AWG 4 solid copper ground wire has been connected to the Ground Lug on the bottom of the enclosure and to
Earth Ground. The units Earth Ground Cable should be clamped to an exposed Ground Rod or to an AWG 0000 stranded copper Ground Cable that in turn should be connected to either an Earth Ground Rod or Earth Ground Bed. Both ends of the units Earth Ground
Cable must be free of any coating such as paint or insulated covering as well as any oxidation. The connecting point of the Ground Rod or AWG 0000 Ground Cable must also be free of any coating and free of oxidation. Once the ground connection has been established (at either the Ground Rod or Ground Cable) it should be covered or coated to protect it from the environment.
S1400A Page 3-18 Section 3 - Grounding & Isolation
Note:
3530-40B not shown but similar to 3530-10B/15B/50B without modem.
3530-55B not shown (see Figure 3-12). Connect AWG 4 Earth Ground
Cable to Ground Lug when a BBI 9600 bps PSTN Modem is installed.
Figure 3-13 - Earth Grounding Of TeleFlow Modem & Case
Note that the recommended grounding convention for a model 3530-XXX is to install the specified AWG 4 Earth Ground Cable between the Ground Lug (on the bottom of the unit in
Section 3 - Grounding & Isolation Page 3-19 S1400A
question) and a known good Earth Ground. Some models may be equipped with an optional radio. Units equipped with the radio option (not shown) may have an optional polyphaser
(lightning arrester) installed. Regardless of the 3530-XXX configuration, an Earth Ground
Cable should always be installed between the units Ground Lug and a known good Earth
Ground.
3.3.3 Other Grounding Considerations
For applications employing equipment that communicates over telephone lines, a lightning arrester Must Be provided. For indoor equipment the lightning arrester must be installed at the point where the communication line enters the building as shown in Figure 3-14. The ground terminal of this arrester must connect to a ground rod and/or a buried ground bed.
For units that are installed outdoors, it is recommended that the lightning arrester be installed to an Earth Ground (Bed) that is not common to the one used by the associated
3530-XXX.
Figure 3-14 - Grounding of Phone Line
Gas lines also require special grounding considerations. If a gas meter run includes a thermocouple or RTD sensor installed in a thermowell, the well (not the sensor) must be connected to a gas discharge-type lightning arrestor as shown in Figure 3-15. A copper braid, brazed to the thermal well, is dressed into a smooth curve and connected to the
S1400A Page 3-20 Section 3 - Grounding & Isolation
arrestor as shown. The curve is necessary to minimize arcing caused by lightning strikes or high static surges. The path from the lightning arrestor to the ground bed should also be smooth and free from sharp bends for the same reason.
Figure 3-15 - Grounding of Thermometer Well in Gas Line
Remove this ground connection from the CPU Board. This cable should be removed (or electrically isolated) if a modem is not present. If a modem is present, the Cabinet Ground Cable should be connected to the modem.
3.4 ISOLATING EQUIPMENT FROM THE PIPELINE
3.4.1 Meter Runs Without Cathodic Protection
TeleFlows (3530-10B, 3530-20B & 3530-40B) may be mounted directly on the pipeline or remotely on a vertical stand-alone two-inch stand-pipe (see Figure 3-16). The Earth Ground
Cable is to run between the TeleFlow’s Ground Lug and Earth Ground (Rod or Bed) even though the TeleFlow'’s Multivariable Transducer may be grounded to the pipeline.
TeleFlow Correctors (3530-50B) are typically mounted directly to a Turbine Meter. The
Earth Ground Cable is to run between the TeleFlow Corrector’s Ground Lug and Earth
Ground (Rod or Bed). If any pressure transmitters or pulse transducers are remotely mounted, connect their chassis grounds to the pipeline or earth ground.
Section 3 - Grounding & Isolation Page 3-21 S1400A
Figure 3-16 - 3530-10B/20B/40B Remote Installation without Cathodic Protection
3.4.2 Meter Runs With Cathodic Protection
Dielectric isolators are available from Bristol Babcock and are always recommended as an added measure in isolating the TeleFlow (3530-10B or 3530-20B) from the pipeline even though the TeleFlow does provide 500V galvanic isolation from the pipeline and should not be affected by cathodic protection or other EMF on the pipeline. TeleFlows (3530-10B, 3530-
20B & 3530-40B) may be mounted directly on the pipeline (see Figure 3-17) or remotely on a vertical stand-alone two-inch stand-pipe (see Figure 3-18). It is recommended that isolation fitting always be used in remotely mounted meter systems. An isolation fittings or gasket should be installed between the following connections: i all conductive tubing that runs between the pipeline and mounting valve manifold and/or the units miltivariable pressure transducer i all conductive connections or tubing runs between the GFC and turbine meter, pulse transducer, or any input other device that is mounted on the pipeline i any Temperature Transducer, Pressure Transmitter, etc. and their mount/interface to the pipeline.
S1400A Page 3-22 Section 3 - Grounding & Isolation
Mount the GFC (3530-10B/20B) or ECR (3530-40B) on a stand-alone vertical 2-inch pipe.
The ground conductor connects between the GFC/ECR’s Ground Lug and a known good earth ground. Connect the cases of Temperature Transducers, Pressure Transmitters, etc., to the known good earth ground. If the mounting 2-inch pipe is in continuity with the pipeline it will have to be electrically isolated from the GFC/ECR. Use a strong heat-shrink material such as RAYCHEM WCSM 68/22 EU 3140. This black tubing will easily slip over the 2-inch pipe and then after uniform heating (e.g., with a rose-bud torch) it electrically insulates and increases the strength of the pipe stand.
See BBI Specification Summary F1670SS-0a for information on PGI Direct Mount Systems and Manifolds.
Figure 3-17 - 3530-10B/20B/40B Direct Mount Installation
(with Cathodic Protection)
Section 3 - Grounding & Isolation Page 3-23 S1400A
Figure 3-18 - 3530-10B/20B/40B Remote Installation
(with Cathodic Protection)
S1400A Page 3-24 Section 3 - Grounding & Isolation
Section 4 - Lightning Arresters & Surge Protectors
4.1 STROKES & STRIKES
Lightning takes the form of a pulse that typically has a 2 µS rise and a 10 µS to 40 µS decay to a 50% level. The IEEE standard is an 8 µS by 20 µS waveform. The peak current will average 18 KA for the first impulse and about half of that for the second and third impulses. Three strokes (impulses) is the average per lightning strike. The number of visible flashes that may be seen is not necessarily the number of electrical strokes.
A lightning strike acts like a constant current source. Once ionization occurs, the air becomes a luminous conductive plasma reaching up to 60,000° F. The resistance of a struck object is of little consequence except for the power dissipation on the object (I 2 x R). Fifty percent of all lightning strikes will have a first impulse of at least 18 KA, ten percent will exceed the 60 KA level, and only about one percent will exceed 120 KA.
4.1.1 Chance of Being Struck by Lightning
The map of Figure 4-1 shows the average annual number of thunderstorm days
(Isokeraunic level) for the various regions within the continental U.S.A. This map is not representative of the severity of the storm or the number of lightning strikes since it does not take into account more than one lightning strike in a thunderstorm day. The
Isokeraunic or Isoceraunic number provides a meteorological indication of the frequency of thunderstorm activity; the higher the Isokeraunic number the greater the lightning strike activity for a given area. These levels vary across the world from a low of 1 to a high of 300.
Within the United States the Isokeraunic level various from a low of 1 to a high of 100.
Figure 4-1 - Average Thunderstorm Days of the Year (for Continental USA)
Section 4 - Lightning & Surge Page 4-1 S1400A
Thunderstorms are cloud formations that produce lightning strikes (or strokes). Across the
United States there is an average of 30 thunderstorm days per year. Any given storm may produce from one to several strokes. Data on the subject indicates that for an average area within the United States there can be eight to eleven strokes to each square mile per year.
The risk of stroke activity is increased for various areas such central Florida where up to 38 strokes to each square mile per year are likely to occur.
To determine the probability of a given structure (tower, building, etc.) (within your location) being struck, perform the following computation:
1.
Using the map of Figure 4-1 (or a comparable meteorological map for your local), find the Isokeraunic level (I) for your area. Then using Chart 1, find “ A ” for your area.
2.
Refer to Figure 4-1 to find the latitude. Then using Chart 2, find “ B ” for your latitude
(Lat.°).
3.
Multiply “ A ” x “ B ” to get “ C ” .
4.
To calculate the number of lightning strikes per year that are likely to strike a given object (tower, mast, etc.), use the equation that follows (where “ C ” was calculated in step 3 and “ H ” is equal to the height of the object.
Strikes Per Year = ( “ C ” x H 2 ) ÷ (.57 x 10 6 )
Chart 1
I “ A ”
5
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
26
8
85
169
275
402
548
712
893
1069
1306
25
30
35
40
45
Chart 2
LAT.° “ B ”
.170
.200
.236
.280
.325
Note for these charts:
I = Thunderstorm Days Per Year (Isokeraunic Number)
A= Stroke activity for associated Isokeraunic Area
B= Height/Stroke coefficient for associated latitude
For Example: On Long Island, New York (Isokeraunic number 20), Chart 1 gives “A” to equal 85. The latitude is approximately 40°. Referring to Chart 2, “B” is found to be equal to
.28. “C” for this example is equal to 23.80. Using the equation for strikes per year, it is determined that a 100-foot tower has .4 chances per year of being struck by lightning.
Assuming that no other structures are nearby, the tower will more than likely be struck by lightning at least once in three years.
Note: The Isokeraunic activity numbers connoted as I, “A” and “B” in Charts 1 and 2 above are provided for the continental United States. Isokeraunic data for various countries is available from various federal or state Civil Engineering or Meterorelogical organizations. This information is typically available from manufacturers of lightning strike protection equipment (such as Lightning Arresters).
Since TeleFlow (3530-XXX) units are battery operated systems that are isolated from AC grids (as they don’t draw power from them), they are typically immune to lightning strikes to power lines or power equipment (except for inductive flashover due to close installation proximity). However, once a radio or modem has been installed into a model 3530-XXX, the
S1400A Page 4-2 Section 4 - Lightning & Surge
possibility of damage due to a lightning strike on power or telephone lines or to a radio antenna or the antenna’s tower must be considered. Model 3530-XXX’s equipped with a radio may have an optional BBI supplied lightning arrester installed. Units equipped with modems have built in Surge Protection circuitry. It is recommended that the additional lightning protection considerations listed below be followed for units installed in areas with a high possibility or history of stroke activity.
Units equipped with a modem : In series with the phone line (as far away as possible from the equipment) – for indoor installations the lightning arrester should typically be located at the point where the line enters the structure.
Units equipped with a radio : Mount antenna discharge unit (lightning arrester) as close as possible to where the lead in wire enters the structure. For an exposed (outdoor)
3530-XXX, in the proximity of the unit. See Antenna Caution below.
4.1.2 Antenna Caution
Each year hundreds of people are killed, mutilated, or receive severe permanent injuries when attempting to install or remove an antenna or antenna lead. In many cases, the victim was aware of the danger of electrocution but failed to take adequate steps to avoid the hazard. For your safety, and for proper installation maintenance, please read and follow the safety precautions that follow - they may save your life .
i When installing or servicing an antenna:
DO NOT use a metal ladder. DO NOT step onto or touch an antenna mast while power is applied to an associated radio unless the radio is a low power (low current) type.
DO NOT work on a wet or windy day, especially during a thunderstorm or when there is lightning or thunder in your area. Dress properly; shoes with rubber soles and heels, rubber gloves, long sleeve shirt or jacket.
i The safe distance from power lines should be at least twice the height of the antenna and mast combination.
i Antenna Grounding per National Electrical Code Instructions:
A.
Use AWG 10 or 8 aluminum or AWG 1 copper-clad steel or bronze wire, or larger as ground wires for both the mast and lead-in. Securely clamp the wire to the bottom of the mast.
B.
Secure lead-in wire from antenna to antenna discharge (lightning arrester) unit and the mast ground wire to the structure (building, shed, etc.) with stand-off insulators spaced from 4 feet (1.22 meters) to 6 feet (1.83 meters) apart.
C.
Mount antenna discharge unit as close as possible to where the lead-in wire enters the structure.
D.
The hole drilled through the wall for the lead-in wire should be just large enough to accommodate the cable. Before drilling this hole, make sure there are no wires or pipes, etc. in the wall.
E.
Push the cable through the hole and form a rain drip loop close to where the wire enters the exterior of the structure.
F.
Caulk around the lead-in wire (where it enters the structure) to keep out drafts.
G.
Install lightning arresters (antenna discharge units). The grounding conductor should be run in as straight a line as practicable from the antenna mast and/or the antenna discharge units to grounding electrode(s).
H.
Only connect the antenna cable to the radio after the mast has been properly grounded and the lead-in cable has been properly connected to lightning arresters which in turn have each been properly connected to a known good earth ground.
Section 4 - Lightning & Surge Page 4-3 S1400A
Figure 4-2 - Radio Antenna Field Installation Site Grounding Diagram
For all systems it is best to have all communication equipment input/output grounds tied together. In the case of TeleFlow (3530-XXX) this is accomplished via the unit’s Ground
Lug. However additional communication equipment lightning arresters and surge suppres-
S1400A Page 4-4 Section 4 - Lightning & Surge
sors should be tied to the same system ground. System ground consists of the tower leg grounds utility ground and bulkhead-equipment ground-stakes that are tied together via bare copper wire.
4.1.3 Ground Propagation
As in any medium, a dynamic pulse, like R.F., will take time to propagate. This propagation time will cause a differential step voltage to exist in time between any two ground rods that are of different radial distances from the strike. With a ground rod tied to a struck tower, the impulse will propagate its step voltage outwardly from this rod in ever-expanding circles, like a pebble thrown into a pond. If the equipment house has a separate ground rod and the power company and/or telephone company grounds are also separate, the dynamic step voltage will cause currents to flow to equalize these separate ground voltages. Then if the coax cable (associated with a radio) is the only path linking the equipment chassis with the tower ground, the surge can destroy circuitry.
4.1.4 Tying it all Together
To prevent this disaster from occurring, a grounding system must be formed which interconnects all grounds together. This will equalize and distribute the surge charge to all grounds, and at the same time, it will make for a lower surge impedance ground system.
This interconnection can be done as a grid, where each ground has a separate line to each other ground, or by using a “rat Race” ring which forms a closed loop (not necessarily a perfect circle) which surrounds the equipment house completely.
By making this interconnection, it will be necessary to use proper I/O protectors for the equipment. Of course, these should be a requirement regardless of whether this grounding technique is used. I/O protectors are used for power lines (even those these don’t feed into a
TeleFlow unit), telephone lines, and also to minimize EMI pick-up from a strike. Ideally it is best to place all I/O protectors on a common panel that has a low inductance path to the ground system. The Teleflow (3530-XXX) would then have a single ground point from its
Ground Lug to this panel. In lieu of this, the 3530-XXX in question should be tied to a ground rod that in turn is connected to the Earth/System Ground created for the site.
Your protected equipment connected to a common single ground system will now be just like a bird sitting on a high tension wire. When lightning strikes, even with a 50 ohm surge impedance ground system, the entire system consisting of equipment, ground system, building, etc., will all rise together to the one million volt peak level (for example) and will all decay back down together. So long as there is no voltage differential (taken care of by protectors and ground interconnections, there will be no current flow through the equipment and therefore no resulting equipment damage.
4.1.5 Impulse Protection Summary i Use more than one ground rod.
i Place multi-ground stakes more than their length apart.
i Tie Power, Telco, Tower, Bulkhead and equipment ground together.
i Make all ground interconnect runs that are above ground with minimum radius bends of eight inches and run them away from other conductors and use large solid wire or a solid strap.
i Watch out for dissimilar metals connections and coat accordingly.
Section 4 - Lightning & Surge Page 4-5 S1400A
i Use bare wire radials together where possible with ground stakes to reduce ground system impedance.
i Use I/O protectors (Phone line, Radio) with a low inductance path to the ground system.
i Ground the Coaxial Cable Shield (or use an impulse suppressor) at the bottom of the tower just above the tower leg ground connection.
4.2 USE OF LIGHTNING ARRESTERS & SURGE PROTECTORS
Units equipped with radios or modems use lightning arresters and surge protectors to protect equipment from lightning strikes, power surges and from damaging currents that have been induced onto communication lines.
The first line of defense is the Lightning Arrester. These devices typically use gas discharge bulbs that can shunt high currents and voltages to earth ground when they fire. The high current, high voltage gas discharge bulb has a relatively slow response time and only fire when their gas has been ionized by high voltage.
The second line of defense is the Surge Protector, which is made of solid state devices, fires very quickly and conducts low voltages and currents to ground. Surge protectors are built into BBI 9600 bps modems.
Lightning Arresters are applied to circuits as follows: i Equipment or circuits that can be exposed to lightning strikes, falling power lines, high ground currents caused by power system faults, by operational problems on electric railways, etc.
i Equipment installed in dry, windy areas, such as the Great Plains and the
Southwaset Desert in the United States. Wind and wind blown dust can cause high voltages (static) to appear on overhead wires, fences, and metal buildings.
Note: Lightning Arresters may explode if lightning strike is very close. Mount lightning arresters where flying parts won't cause injury to equipment or personnel.
S1400A Page 4-6 Section 4 - Lightning & Surge
Section 5 - Wiring Techniques
5.1 OVERVIEW
This section provides information pertaining to good wiring practices. Installation of Power and “Measurement & Control” wiring is discussed. Information on obscure problems, circulating ground and power loops, bad relays, etc. is presented. Good wire preparation and connection techniques along with problems to avoid are discussed.
5.2 INSTRUMENT WIRING
Each of the rules listed below is briefly discussed; the emphasis herein is placed on the avoidance of problems as well as equipment safety.
Rule 1 - Never utilize common returns.
Rule 2 - Use twisted shielded pairs (with overall insulation) on all Signal/Control circuits.
Rule 3 - Ground cable shields at one end only.
Rule 4 - Use known good earth grounds (Rod, Bed, System) and test them periodically,
Rule 5 - Earth connections must utilize smoothly dressed large wire.
Rule 6 - Perform all work neatly and professionally.
Rule 7 - Route high power conductors away from signal wiring according to NEC Rules.
Rule 8 - Use appropriately sized wires as required by the load.
Rule 9 - Use lightning arresters and surge protectors.
Rule 10 - Make sure all wiring connections are secure.
5.2.1 Common Returns
Use of common returns on I/O wiring is one of the most common causes of obscure and difficult to troubleshoot control signal problems. Since all wires and connections have distributed resistance, inductance and capacitance, the chances of a achieving a balanced system when common returns are present is very remote. Balanced systems (or circuits) are only achieved when all currents and voltages developed in association with each of the common returns are equal. In a balanced system (or circuit) there are no noise or measurment errors introduced due to by “sneak circuits.”
The illustration of Figure 5-1 shows the difference between testing an I/O circuit that is discrete and has no sneak circuits and one that utilizes common returns. Common sense tells us that it is tough to mix up connections to a twisted shielded pair (with overall vinyl covering) to every end device. Do yourself a favor; to make start up easier, DON’T USE
COMMON RETURNS!
Section 5 - Wiring Techniques Page 5-1 S1400A
Figure 5-1 - Field Wired Circuits With & Without A Common Return
5.2.2 Use of Twisted Shielded Pair Wiring (with Overall Insulation)
For all field I/O wiring the use of twisted shielded pairs with overall insulation is highly recommended. This type of cable provides discrete insulation for each of the wires and an additional overall insulated covering that provides greater E.M.I. immunity and protection to the shield as well.
S1400A Page 5-2 Section 5 - Wiring Techniques
5.2.3 Grounding of Cable Shields
DO NOT connect the cable shield to more than one ground point; it should only be grounded at one end. Cable shields that are grounded at more than one point or at both ends may have a tendency to induce circulating currents or sneak circuits that raise havoc with I/O signals. This will occur when the ground systems associated with multipoint connections to a cable shield have a high resistance or impedance between them and a ground induced voltage is developed (for what ever reason, i.e., man made error or nature produced phenomena).
5.2.4 Use of Known Good Earth Grounds
TeleFlow (models 3530-XXX) should only have one connection to earth ground. This connection is provided via the Ground Lug that is situated on the bottom of the unit. Some older units will require the installation of this ground lug when a connection to earth ground becomes absolutely necessary, i.e., when a radio or modem is added to the unit.
Since model 3530-XXX’s are DC-based systems, grounding does not take into account AC power grounding considerations. Earth grounding the 3530-XXX unit (case) is absolutely necessary when the unit is equipped with a radio or modem. Additionally these units should be connected to earth ground when they are installed in areas that have frequent lightning strikes or are located near or used in conjunction with equipment that is likely to be struck by lightning or if struck by lightning may cause equipment or associated system failure. Earth Grounds must be tested and must be known to be good before connecting the
TeleFlow. Earth grounds must be periodically tested and maintained (see Section 4).
5.2.5 Earth Ground Wires
Earth connections must utilize smoothly dressed large wire. Use AWG 3 or 4 stranded copper wire with as short a length as possible. Exercise care when trimming the insulation from the wire ends. Twists the strands tightly, trim off any frizzes and tin the ends with solder. The earth ground wire should be clamped or brazed to the Ground Bed Conductor
(that is typically a standard AWG 0000 copper cable. The earth ground wire should be run such that any routing bend in the cable is a minimum 8-inch radius above ground or a minimum 12-inch radius below ground. The only earth ground connection permitted to the
TeleFlow must be made via the unit’s Ground Lug. Make sure that the connection at the
TeleFlow’s Ground Lug is secure.
5.2.6 Working Neatly & Professionally
Take pride in your work and observe all site and maintenance safety precautions. After properly trimming the stranded pair wire ends, twist them in the same direction as their manufacturer did and then tin them with solder. Install the tinned wire end into it’s connector and then secure the associated connector’s clamping screw. Remember to check these connections for tightness from time to time. If solid copper wire is used (in conjunction with the DC Power System or for Earth Ground) make sure that the conductor is not nicked when trimming off the insulation. Nicked conductors are potential disasters waiting to happen. Neatly trim shields and whenever possible, coat them to protect them and prevent shorts and water entry.
Section 5 - Wiring Techniques Page 5-3 S1400A
Remember loose connections, bad connections, intermittent connections, corroded connections, etc., are hard to find, waste time, create system problems and confusion in addition to being costly.
5.2.7 High Power Conductors and Signal Wiring
When routing wires, keep high power conductors away from signal conductors. Space wires appropriately to vent high voltage inductance. Refer to the National Electrical Code
Handbook for regulatory and technical requirements.
5.2.8 Use of Proper Wire Size
TeleFlows utilize compression-type terminals that accommodate up to AWG 14 gauge wire.
A connection is made by inserting the bared end (1/4 inch max.) into the clamp beneath the screw and securing the screw.
Allow some slack in the wires when making terminal connections. Slack makes the connections more manageable and minimizes mechanical strain on the PCB connectors.
Provide external strain relief (utilizing Tie Wrap, etc.) to prevent the loose of slack at the
TeleFlow.
Be careful to use wire that is appropriately sized for the load. Refer to equipment manufacturer’s Specs. and the National Electrical Code Handbook for information on wire size and wire resistance. After installing the field wiring, test each load to determine if the correct voltage or current is present at the load. If you know the resistance of the field wires
(Circular Mills x Length) you should be able to calculate the load voltage. Conversely, if you know the minimum load voltage and current, you should be able to derive the maximum voltage loss that is allowable due to line resistance and then the correct wire size.
Referring to Figure 5-2, a relay that is picked by 100 mA, with a loop supply voltage of 24V and a total line resistance of 20 ohms, the load voltage (voltage across the relay) should be:
V
L
= V
S
- (V
22 = 24 - 2
C
+ V
C
)
where
V
C where 2V
+ V
C
= (R
C
+ R
= (20 Ω
C
) I
) x 0.1 A
Figure 5-2 - Calculating Load Voltage due to Line Resistance
5.2.9 Lightning Arresters & Surge Protectors
Use lightning arresters in association with any radio or modem equipped unit. BBI 9600 bps modems are equipped with surge protection circuitry. Lightning arresters or Antenna
S1400A Page 5-4 Section 5 - Wiring Techniques
Discharge Units should be placed on the base of the antenna and at the point where the antenna lead (typically coax) enters the site equipment building. When a modem is used, a lightning arrester should be placed at the point where the phone line enters the site equipment building. If you use a modem (manufactured by other than BBI) it is recommended that you also install a surge suppressors or lightning arrester on the phone line as close to the modem as possible. Any unit equipped with a radio or modem must be connected to a known good earth ground via the units Ground Lug.
5.2.10 Secure Wiring Connections
Make sure that all wiring connections are secure. In time wires that were once round will become flattened due to the pressure applied by screw compression type terminals and site vibrations. After a while these compression screws have a tendency to become loose. Part of a good maintenance routine should be to check and tighten all screws associated with wiring terminal connections. Avoid nicking the wire(s) when stripping insulation.
Remember, nicked conductors will lead to future problems. Also remember to provide some cabling slack and strain relief.
If installing stranded or braided wiring that has not been tinned, be sure to tightly twist the end (in the same direction as manufactured) and then trim off any frizzed wires.
Section 5 - Wiring Techniques Page 5-5 S1400A
BLANK PAGE
READER RESPONSE FORM
Please help us make our documentation more useful to you! If you have a complaint, a suggestion, or a correction regarding this manual, please tell us by mailing this page with your comments. It's the only way we know we're doing our job by giving you correct, complete, and useful documentation.
DOCUMENT NUMBER: S1400A
TITLE: TeleFlow TM SITE CONSIDERATIONS For EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION,
GROUNDING & WIRING
ISSUE DATE: APRIL, 2003
COMMENT/COMPLAINT:
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
Mail this page to:
Bristol Babcock Inc.
1100 Buckingham Street
Watertown, CT 06795
Attn: Technical Publications Group, Dept. 315
Bristol Babcock
1100 Buckingham Street
Watertown, CT 06795
Phone: +1 (860) 945-2200
Fax: +1 (860) 945-2213
Website: www.bristolbabcock.com
U.S.A. Locations:
Northern Region
Bristol Babcock Inc.
1100 Buckingham Street
Watertown, CT 06795
Phone: +1 (860) 945-2381
Fax: +1 (860) 945-2525
Gulf Coast Region
Bristol Babcock Inc.
2000 Governor's Circle
Suite F
Houston, TX 77092-8731
Phone: +1 (713) 685-6200
Fax: +1 (713) 681-7331
Western Region
Bristol Babcock Inc.
1609 South Grove Avenue
Suites 106 & 107
Ontario, CA 91761
Phone: +1 (909) 923-8488
Fax: +1 (909) 923-8988
Southeast Region
Bristol Babcock Inc.
317 S. North Lake Blvd.
Suite 1016
Altamonte Springs, FL 32701
Phone: +1 (407) 740-7084
Fax: +1 (407) 629-2106
Helicoid Instruments
1100 Buckingham Street
Watertown, CT 06795
Phone: +1 (860) 945-2218
Fax: +1 (860) 945-2213 [email protected]
Central Region
Bristol Babcock Inc.
777 South Central
Expressway
Suite 1-C
Richardson, TX 75080
Phone: +1 (972) 238-8197
Fax: +1 (972) 238-8198 [email protected]
International Affiliates:
Canada
Bristol Babcock, Canada
234 Attwell Drive
Toronto, Ont. M9W 5B3
Canada
PH: 416-675-3820
FAX: 416-674-5129 [email protected]
Mexico
BBI, S.A. de C.V.
Homero No. 1343, 3er Piso
Col. Morales Polanco
11540 Mexico, D.F.
Mexico
PH: (52-55)-52-81-81-12
FAX: (52-55)-52-81-81-09
Rocky Mountain Region
Bristol Babcock Inc.
906 San Juan Blvd., Suite A
Farmington, NM 87401
Phone: +1 (505) 320-5046
Fax: +1 (505) 327-3273
Communications
Technology Group
Bristol Babcock Inc.
317 S. North Lake Blvd.
Suite 1016
Altamonte Springs, FL 32701
Phone: +1 (407) 629-9464
Fax: +1 (407) 629-2106 [email protected]
United Kingdom
Bristol Babcock Ltd.
Vale Industrial Estate
Stourport Road
Kidderminster
Worcestershire DY11 7QU
United Kingdom
PH: +44 (0) 1562 820001
FAX: +44 (0) 1562 746721 [email protected]
Asia Pacific
Bristol Babcock, Inc.
PO Box 1987
Bunbury, Western Australia
6231
PH: +61 (0) 8 9791 3654
FAX: +61 (0) 8 9791 3173 [email protected]
Victoria, Australia
PH: +61 (0) 3 9384 2171
FAX: +61 (0) 3 8660 2501
Calgary Office
Bristol Babcock, Canada
3812 Edmonton Trail N.E.
Calgary, Alberta T2E 5T6
Canada
PH: 403-265-4808
FAX: 403-233-2914 [email protected]
Villahermosa Office
BBI, S.A. de C.V.
Av. Plomo No.2
Bodega No. 1 - Ciudad
Industrial
Villahermosa, Tabasco 86010
Mexico
PH: 52-993-353-3142
FAX: 52-993-353-3145 [email protected]
Middle East
Bristol Babcock Ltd.
Vale Industrial Estate
Stourport Road
Kidderminster
Worcestershire DY11 7QU
United Kingdom
PH: +44 (0) 1562 820001
FAX: +44 (0) 1562 746721 [email protected]
RC Rev: 27-Mar-03
ESDS Manual
S14006
4/15/92
CARE AND HANDLING
OF
PC BOARDS
AND
E SD-SENSITIVE
COMPONENTS
BRISTOL BABCOCK
BLANK PAGE
ESDS Manual
S14006
4/15/92
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
TOOLS AND MATERIALS REQUIRED 1
ESD-SENSITIVE COMPONENT HANDLING PROCEDURE 2
3. Protecting ESD-Sensitive Components 5
4. Static-Safe Field Procedure 6
TOOLS AND MATERIALS REQUIRED
1. Tools
Anti-Static Field kit. It is recommended that an anti-static field kit be kept on any site where solid-state printed circuit boards and other ESD-sensitive components are handled. These kits are designed to remove any existing static charge and to prevent the build-up of a static charge that could damage a PC board or
ESD-sensitive components. The typical anti-static field kit consists of the following components:
1. A work surface (10mm conductive plastic sheet with a female snap fastener in one corner for ground cord attachment).
2. A 15-foot long ground cord for grounding the work surface.
3. Wrist strap (available in two sizes, large and small, for proper fit and comfort) with a female snap fastener for ground cord attachment.
4. A coiled ground cord with a practical extension length of 10 feet for attachment to the wrist strap.
Toothbrush (any standard one will do)
1
ESDS Manual
#S14006
4/15/92
2.
Materials
Inhibitor (Texwipe Gold Mist ; Chemtronics Gold Guard, or equivalent)
Cleaner (Chemtronics Electro-Wash; Freon TF, or equivalent)
Wiping cloth (Kimberly-Clark Kim Wipes, or equivalent)
1.
ESD-SENSITIVE COMPONENT HANDLING PROCEDURE
Introduction
Microelectronic devices such as PC boards, chips and other components are electrostatic-sensitive. Electrostatic discharge (ESD) of as few as 110 volts can damage or disrupt the functioning of such devices. Imagine the damage possible from the 35,000 volts (or more) that you can generate on a dry winter day by simply walking across a carpet. In fact, you can generate as much as 6,000 volts just working at a bench.
There are two kinds of damage that can be caused by the static charge. The more severe kind results in complete failure of the PC board or component. This kind of damage is relatively simple, although often expensive, to remedy by replacing the affected item(s). The second kind of damage results in a degradation or weakening which does not result in an outright failure of the component. This kind of damage is difficult to detect and often results in faulty performance, intermittent failures, and service calls.
Minimize the risk of ESD-sensitive component damage by preventing static build-up and by promptly removing any existing charge. Grounding is effective, if the carrier of the static charge is conductive such as a human body. To protect components from
nonconductive carriers of static charges such as plastic boxes, place the component in static-shielding bags.
This manual contains general rules to be followed while handling ESD-sensitive components. Use of the anti-static field kit to properly ground the human body as well as the work surface is also discussed.
2
ESDS Manual
S14006
4/15/92
Table 1
Typical Electrostatic Voltages
Electrostatic Voltages
10-20 Percent
Relative Humidity
65-90 Percent
Relative Humidity
Means of Static
Generation
Walking across carpet
Walking over vinyl floor
Worker at bench
Vinyl envelopes for work instructions
Poly bag picked up from bench
Work chair padded with poly foam
35,000
12,000
6,000
7,000
20,000
18,000
1,500
250
100
600
1,200
1,500
2.
General Rules
(1) ESD-sensitive components shall only be removed from their static-shielding bags by a person who is properly grounded.
(2) When taken out of their static-shielding bags, ESD-sensitive components shall
never be placed over, or on, a surface which has not been properly grounded.
(3) ESD-sensitive components shall be handled in such a way that the body does not come in contact with the conductor paths and board components. Handle
ESD-sensitive components in such a way that they will not suffer damage from physical abuse or from electric shock.
(4) EPROMS/PROMS shall be kept in anti-static tubes until they are ready to use and shall be removed only by a person who is properly grounded.
(5) When inserting and removing EPROMS/PROMS from PC boards, use a chip removal tool similar to the one shown in the figure following. Remember, all work should be performed on a properly grounded surface by a properly-grounded person.
3
ESDS Manual
#S14006
4/15/92
4
Typical Chip Removal Tool
(6) It is important to note when inserting EPROMS/PROMS, that the index notch on the PROM must be matched with the index notch on the socket. Before pushing the chip into the socket, make sure all the pins are aligned with the respective socket-holes. Take special care not to crush any of the pins as this could destroy the chip.
(7) Power the system down before removing or inserting comb connectors/plugs or removing and reinstalling PC boards or ESD-sensitive components from card files or mounting hardware. Follow the power-down procedure applicable to the system being serviced.
(8) Handle all defective boards or components with the same care as new components. This helps eliminate damage caused by mishandling. Do not strip used PC boards for parts. Ship defective boards promptly to Bristol Babcock in a staticshielding bag placed inside static-shielding foam and a box to avoid damage during shipment.
ESDS Manual
S14006
4/15/92
CAUTION
Don't place ESD-sensitive components and paperwork in the same bag.
The static caused by sliding the paper into the bag could develop a charge and damage the component(s).
(9) Include a note, which describes the malfunction, in a separate bag along with each component being shipped. The repair facility will service the component and promptly return it to the field.
3.
Protecting ESD-Sensitive Components
(1) As stated previously, it is recommended that an electrically-conductive anti-static field kit be kept on any site where ESD-sensitive components are handled. A recommended ESD-protective workplace arrangement is shown on page 7. The anti-static safety kit serves to protect the equipment as well as the worker. As a safety feature, a resistor (usually of the one-megohm, 1/2-watt, current-limiting type) has been installed in the molded caps of the wrist strap cord and the ground cord. This resistor limits current should a worker accidently come in contact with a power source. Do not remove the molded caps from grounded cords. If a cord is damaged, replace it immediately.
(2) Be sure to position the work surface so that it does not touch grounded conductive objects. The protective resistor is there to limit the current which can flow through the strap. When the work surface touches a grounded conductive object, a short is created which draws the current flow and defeats the purpose of the current-limiting resistor.
(3) Check resistivity of wrist strap periodically using a commercially-available system tester similar to the one shown in the figure below:
5
ESDS Manual
#S14006
4/15/92
Note: If a system checker is not available, use an ohmmeter connected to the cable ends to measure its resistance. The ohmmeter reading should be 1 megohm +/-
15%. Be sure that the calibration date of the ohmmeter has not expired. If the ohmmeter reading exceeds 1 megohm by +/- 15%, replace the ground cord with a new one.
4.
Static-safe Field Procedure
(1) On reaching the work location, unfold and lay out the work surface on a convenient surface (table or floor). Omit this step if the table or floor has a built-in ESD-safe work surface.
(2) Attach the ground cord to the work surface via the snap fasteners and attach the other end of the ground cord to a reliable ground using an alligator clip.
(3) Note which boards or components are to be inserted or replaced.
(4) Power-down the system following the recommended power-down procedure.
(5) Slip on a known-good wristband, which should fit snugly; an extremely loose fit is not desirable.
(6) Snap the ground cord to the wristband. Attach the other end of the ground cord to a reliable ground using the alligator clip.
6
ESDS Manual
S14006
4/15/92
(7) The components can now be handled following the general rules as described in the instruction manual for the component.
(8) Place the component in a static-shielding bag before the ground cord is disconnected. This assures protection from electrostatic charge in case the work surface is located beyond the reach of the extended ground cord.
A
C
✰
R
R
D
E F
R
R
EARTH GROUND
B
G
FLOOR OF BUILDING
LEGEND
A - Chair with ground (optional)
B - ESD protective floor mat (optional)
C - Wrist strap
D - ESD protective trays, etc.
E - Ionizer
F - Other electrical equipment
G - Workbench with ESD protective table top
✰
NOTE: ALL RESISTORS 1M
Ω
+/-10% 1/2W
7
ESDS Manual
#S14006
4/15/92
(9) If a component is to undergo on-site testing, it may be safely placed on the grounded work surface for that purpose.
(10) After all component work is accomplished, remove the wrist straps and ground wire and place in the pouch of the work surface for future use.
5.
Cleaning And Lubricating
The following procedure should be performed periodically for all PC boards and when a PC board is being replaced.
CAUTION
Many PC board connectors are covered with a very fine gold-plate.
Do not use any abrasive cleaning substance or object such as a pencil eraser to clean connectors.
Use only the approved cleaner/lubricants specified in the procedure following.
WARNING
Aerosol cans and products are extremely combustible.
Contact with a live circuit, or extreme heat can cause an explosion.
Turn OFF all power and find an isolated, and ventilated area to use any aerosol products specified in this procedure.
(1) Turn the main line power OFF. Blow or vacuum out the component. This should remove potential sources of dust or dirt contamination during the remainder of this procedure.
8
ESDS Manual
S14006
4/15/92
(2) Clean PC board connectors as follows: a.
Review the static-safe field procedure detailed earlier.
b.
c.
Following the ESD-sensitive component handling procedures, remove the connectors from the boards and remove the PC boards from their holders.
Use cleaner to remove excessive dust build-up from comb connectors and other connectors. This cleaner is especially useful for removing dust.
d.
Liberally spray all PC board contacts with Inhibitor. The inhibitor:
Provides a long lasting lubricant and leaves a protective film to guard against corrosion e.
f.
Improves performance and reliability
Extends the life of the contacts
Is nonconductive, and is safe for use on most plastics
Clean the comb contacts using a lint-free wiping cloth.
Lightly mist all comb contacts again with Inhibitor.
NOTE: Do not use so much Inhibitor that it drips.
g.
Repeat the above procedure for the other PC boards from the device.
(3) Cleaning PC edge connectors a.
Use cleaner to remove excessive dust build-up from connectors. This cleaner is especially useful for removing dust.
b.
c.
Liberally spray the outboard connector with Inhibitor.
Lightly brush the outboard connector with a soft, non-metallic, bristle brush such as a toothbrush.
9
ESDS Manual
#S14006
4/15/92 d.
e.
Spray the connector liberally to flush out any contaminants.
Remove any excess spray by shaking the connector or wiping with either a toothbrush, or a lint-free wiping cloth.
6.
Completion
(1) Replace any parts that were removed.
(2) Make sure that the component cover is secure.
(3) Return the system to normal operation.
(4) Check that the component operates normally.
10
TeleFlow
Material Safety Data Sheets
Material Safety Data Sheets are provided herein to comply with OSHA’s Hazard
Communication Standard, 29 CFR 1910.1200. This standard must be consulted for specific requirements.
Material Safety Data Sheets are provided in the order listed in Table Z-1 below.
TABLE Z-1 MSDS for TeleFlow Instruction Manual CI-3530-15B
Manufacturer
Power-Sonic
Corp.
Tadiran
Electronics
General Description
Bristol Babcock Part Number or Media Notes
Sealed Lead-Acid Battery 395407-02-8 (12V - 7AH)
Lithium/Thionyl Chloride
Battery
390618-03-9 (3.6V - On-board)
06/18/98 Appendix Z - CI-3530-15B MSDS
BLANK PAGE
MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET
Product Name: Sealed Maintenance Free Lead-Acid Batteries
DATE:
COMPONENTS
Lead (Pb, Pb0
2
, PBSO
4
)
Sulfuric Acid
Fiberglass Separator
ABS Plastic
COMPONENTS
Lead
Lead Sulfate
Lead Dioxide
Sulfuric Acid
Fiberglass Separator
ABS Plastic
COMPONENTS
Lead
Sulfuric Acid
Hydrogen
Fiberglass Separator
ABS Plastic
Skin Contact:
Eye Contact:
Ingestion:
10/1/2003
WEIGHT %
6.2
9.4
about 1.3
N/A
ISSUED BY ENGINEERING
HAZARDOUS COMPONENTS
LD50
TLV
N/A
1mg/m 3
ORAL
(500) mg/kg
(2,140) mg/kg about 70% about 20% about 5% about 5%
DENSITY
11.34
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
PHYSICAL DATA
MELTING POINTS
SOLLUBILITY
(H
2
O)
327.4º C (Boiling)
1070º C (Boiling)
None
40 mg/l(15 0 C)
290º C (Boiling) about 114º C (Boiling)
N/A
None
100%
Slight
N/A N/A None
FLAMMABILITY DATA
FLASHPOINT EXPLOSIVE LIMIT
None
None
None
None
N/A
None
4% - 72.4%
N/A
N/A
TELEPHONE NO.
LC50
INHALATION
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
ODOR
None
None
None
Acidic
Toxic
No Odor
COMMENTS
(619) 661-2030
LC50
CONTACT
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
APPEARANCE
Silver-Gray Metal
White Powder
Brown Powder
Clear Colorless Liquid
White Fibrous Glass
Solid
Sealed batteries can emit hydrogen if over charged
(float voltage > 2.40 VPC).
Toxic vapors may be released. In case of fire, wear self-contained breathing apparatus.
Temp. over 300º C (572º F) may release combustible gases. In case of fire: wear positive pressure self-contained breathing apparatus.
FIRST AID
SULFURIC ACID PRECAUTIONS
Flush with water, see physician if contact area is large or if blisters form.
Call physician immediately and flush with water until physician arrives.
Call physician. If patient is conscious, flush mouth with water, have patient drink milk or sodium bicarbonate solution.
Continued on Page 2
MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET
(PAGE 2 OF 2)
C O M P O N E N T
S T A B I L I T Y
C O L Y M E R I Z A T I O N
I N C O M P A T I B I L I T Y
D E C O M P O S I T I O N P R O D U C T S
C O N D I T I O N S T O A V O I D
R E A C T I V I T Y D A T A
S u l f u r i c A cid
S t a b l e a t a l l t e m p e r a t u r es
W i l l n o t p o l y m e r i ze
R e a c t i v e m e t a l s , s t r o n g b a s e s , m o s t o r g a n i c c o m p o u n d s
S u l f u r i c d i o x i d e , t r i o x i d e , h y d r o g e n s u l f i d e , h y d r o g e n
P r o h i b i t s m o k i n g , s p a r k s , e t c .
f r o m b a t t e r y c h a r g i n g a r e a .
A v o i d m i x i n g a c i d w i t h o t h e r c h e m i c a l s
S t
W e a p s t s e t o t d i s a k e p o s a i l n c a m e t s e h o o f d : l e a k o r s p i l l :
S P I L L O R L E A K P R O C E D U R E S
I f s u l f u r i c a c i d i s s p i l l e d f r o m a b a t t e r y , n e u t c a r b o n s y s t e m .
( s o
D o d a n o a s h ) , t o a l l o w r c a l c i u m u n n e u t r a l o x i d e i z e d
( l i m e ) .
a c i d i n t o r i l i z e a c i d
F l u s h a r e a s e w a g e s w i t h b i c a r b o n a t e w y s i t h t e m .
w a t e r a n d d
( b a k i n g i s c a r d t s o o d a t h e
) , s o d i u m s e w a g e
N e u w a s t t r i l e i z e d a n d a c i d d i s p o m a y s e d b o f e f l u s h a c c o r e d d i d o n g t w o n t h e l o c a ,l s e w e r .
s t a t e ,
S p a n d e f n t e d b a t t e r i e s e r a l g u i d e m l i u s t n e s .
b e
A t r e a t e d c o p y o f a s h t h i s a z a r
M S d o u s
D S m u s t b e s u p p l i e d t o a n y s c r a p d e a l e r o r s e c o n d a r y l e a d s m e l t e r w i t h b a t t e r y .
P R O T E C T I O N
S
R
E
K
E
Y
I
S P
E
N
S
I R
E
A T
X P
O R
O S
Y
U R E S I T E P R O T E C T I ON C O M M E N TS
R u b b e r g l o v e s , A p r on
R e s p i r a t o r ( f o r l e a d)
P r o t e c t i v e e q u i p m e n t o t h e r w i s e d a m a g e d .
A m u r e s t b s p i r e a t w o o r r n i f t h s h o u l d e b b a t t e r y i s e c r a c k e d o r w o r n d u r i n g r e c l a i m o p e r a t i o n s i f t h e T L V i s e x c e e d e d .
S a f e t y g o g g l e s , F a c e S h i e ld
E L E C T R I C A L S A F E T Y
D u e t o t h e b a t t e r y ' s l o w i n t e r n a l r e s i s t a n c e a n d h i g h p o w e r d e n s i t y , h i g h l e v e l s o f s h o r t c i r c u i t c u r r e n t c a n b e d e v e l o p e d a c r o s s t h e b a t t e r y t e r m i n a l s .
D o n o t r e s t t o o l s m a i n t a i n i n g b a t t e r y s y s t e m s .
o r c a b l e s o n t h e b a t t e r y .
U s e i n s u l a t e d t o o l s o n l y .
F o l l o w a l l i n s t a l l a t i o n i n s t r u c t i o n s a n d d i a g r a m s w h e n i n s t a l l i n g o r
H E A L T H H A Z A R D D A T A
L E A D : T h e t o x i c e f f e c t s o f l e a d a r e a c c u m u l a t i v e a n d s l o w t o a p p e a r .
I t a f f e c t s t h e k i d n e y s , r e p r o d u c t i v e , a n d c e n t r a l n e r v o u s s y s t e m s .
T h e s y m p p a i n .
t o m s
E x p o o f s u r l e e a d t o o v e r l e a d e x p o f r o m s u a r e a b a t r e t e r a n e m i a , y m o s t v o m o f t e r n i t i n g o c
, c h u r e a s d a c h e d u r i n g
, l s t o m a c h e a d r e c l a i p a i n ( l e a d m o p e r a t i c o l o n s i c ) , t h r o d i z z i n e s s , u g h t h e l o s s b r e a t h o f i n g a p p o r e t i t e , a n d m u s c l e a n d i n g e s t i o n o f l e a d d u s t j o i n t o r f u m e s .
S U L a c i d
F U w i l l
R c
I C a u s
A e
C I D : S u l f u r i c
G I t r a c t b u r n s .
a c i d
A c i d i s a c a n s t r o n g b e r e l c o e a r r o s s e d i v i f e t
.
h
C o n t a c t w i t h a c i d e b a t t e r y c a s e i s d c a n a m a c g a s e d u e s e v e r e o r i f v e n t s b u r n s a r e o n t h e s t a m p e r e d k i n w i t a n d h .
i n e y e s .
I n g e s t i o n o f s u l f u r i c
F I B E R G L A S S S E P A R A T O R :
C o m f o l l w i t h t y p e H f i l t e r .
A b o v e
N T P o r O S H A .
F i b r o u r g l a s s
1 0 F / C C u p t o i s a n i r r i t a
5 0 F / C C n t u s o f t h e e U l t r u a p p e r
T w i n r e p i r a t o r y w i t h t y p e t r a c t ,
H f i l s t e r .
k i n
T h a n d i s p e r o y e s .
d u c t
F o r e x p o s u r e i s n o t c o n s i d u p e r e d t o 1 0 F / C C u c a r c i n o g e n i c s e M b y
S A
A L L D A T A M U S T B E P A S S E D T O A N Y S C R A P D E A L E R O R S M E L T E R W H E N B A T T E R Y I S R E S O L D .
Power-Sonic Corporation
9163 Siempre Viva Road, San Diego, CA 92154 Tel (619) 661-2020 Fax (619) 661-3650
Website: www.power-sonic.com E-Mail: [email protected]
B
MSDS No.- T-36-01 (Revision. -G)
Q u a l i t y F i r s t
MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET
SECTION 1- CHEMICAL PRODUCT AND COMPANY IDENTIFICATION
Manufacturer Name- Tadiran Batteries Ltd., P. O. Box 1, Kiryat Ekron, Israel 70500.
US office address- 2 Seaview Blvd. Port Washington NY 11050
Emergency Telephone No. – CHEMTREC: 1-800-424-9300
Tel. for information: 1-516-621-4980
Tel. for information 972-8-944-4503
Products Name: Primary Lithium Thionyl Chloride (Li/SOCl
2
) cells and batteries, Nonrechargeable. Cells include the models of TL, TLH, and TLL, 3.6V series.
SECTION 2- COMPOSITION, INFORMATION ON INGREDIENTS
Ingredient Name
Lithium Metal (Li)
CAS # % ACGIH (TLV) OHSA
(PEL)
7439-93-2 <5% Not Established None
CHIP
Classification
F: R14/15
C: R34
Thionyl Chloride (SOCl
Lithium Chloride (LiCl)
2
) 7719-09-7 <47
7447-41-8
%
1 ppm
(5 mg/M 3 )
<2% Not Established
R: 14/15, 34
S: (1/2), 8,43,45
5 mg/m 3 R: 14,20/22,29,
35.
S: (1/2),26,36/
37/39, 45
Carbon (C)
Aluminum Chloride (AlCl
3
1333-86-4 <6% 3.5 mg/m
) 7446-70-0 <5% 2 mg/m 3
3 3.5
(Al salt, soluble)
R:
S:
45
34
(1/2),7/8,28,
SECTION 3 - HAZARD IDENTIFICATION
The lithium Thionyl chloride batteries described in this MSDS are hermetically sealed units, which are not hazardous when used according to the recommendations of the manufacturer.
Under normal condition of use of the batteries, the electrode materials and the liquid electrolyte they contained are non-reactive provided the battery integrity is maintained. Risk of exposure exists only in case of mechanical, electrical or thermal abuse. Thus the batteries should not short circuit, recharge, puncture, incinerate, crush, immerse in water, force discharge, or expose to temperatures above the temperature range of the cell or battery. In these cases there is risk of fire or explosion
MSDS SOCl2 G rev GB.doc
1/6 Revised- 22/9/2004
B
SECTION 4- FIRST AID MEASURES
Q u a l i t y F i r s t
In case of battery rupture, explosion, or major leakage, evacuate personnel from contaminated area and provide good ventilation to clear out corrosive fumes, gases or the pungent odor. Seek immediate medical attention.
Eyes First rinse with plenty of water for 15 minutes (remove contact lenses if easily possible), and then seek medical attention.
Skin Remove contaminated clothes and rinse skin with plenty of water or shower for
15 min. Refer to medical attention.
Inhalation Remove to fresh air, rest, and half-upright position, use artificial respiration if needed, and refer to medical attention.
Ingestion rinse mouth, DO NOT induce vomiting, give plenty of water to drink, and refer to medical attention.
SECTION 5- FIRE FIGHTING MEASURES
FLAMMABLE LIMIT IN AIR: NA
EXTINGUISHING MEDIA:
1. Lith- X (Class D extinguishing media) is the only effective on fires involving a few lithium batteries. If the cells are directly involved in a fire DO NOT USE: WATER,
SAND, CO
2
, HALON, and DRY POWDER OR SODA ASH EXTINGUISHERS.
2. If the fire is in adjacent area and the cells that are either packed in their original containers or unpacked, the fire can be fought based on fueling material, e.g., paper and plastic products. In these cases the use of copious amounts of cold water is effective extinguishing media. Storage area may employ sprinkler system with cold water.
AUTO-IGNITION: NA
SPECIAL FIRE FIGHTING PROCEDURES: Wear self-contained breathing apparatus to avoid breathing of irritant fumes (NIOSH approved SCBA & full protective equipment). Wear protective clothing and equipment to prevent body contact with electrolyte solution.
Fire may be fought, but only from safe fire-fighting distance. Evacuate all persons from immediate area of fire.
UNUSUAL EXPLOSION AND FIRE EXPLOSION: Battery may explode when subject to: excessive heat (above 150ºC), recharged, over-discharged (discharge below 0V), punctured and crushed. During thermal decomposition generation of chlorine (Cl
2
), hydrogen chloride (HCl), and sulfur dioxide (SO
2
) can be formed.
SECTION 6- SPILL OR LEAKAGE PROCEDURES
PROCEDURES TO CONTAIN AND CLEAN UP LEAKS OR SPILLS: The material contained within the battery would only be released under abusive conditions.
In the event of battery rapture and leakage: contain the spill while wearing proper protective clothing and ventilate the area. Than, cover with sodium carbonate
MSDS SOCl2 G rev GB.doc
2/6 Revised- 22/9/2004
B
Q u a l i t y F i r s t
(Na
2
CO
3
) or 1:1 mixture of soda ash and slaked slime. Keep away from water, rain, and snow. Placed in approved container (after cooling if necessary) and disposed according to the local regulations.
NEUTRALIZING AGENT: Sodium carbonate (Na
2 and slaked slime.
CO
3
) or 1:1 mixture of soda ash
WASTE DISPOSAL METHOD: Product decomposed by water must be neutralized.
May be added to waste water in sufficiently diluted form.
PRECAUTIONS IN HANDLING AND STORING; Avoid short-circuiting, overcharging and heating to high temperatures. Store the batteries in dry and cool area and keep container dry and tightly closed in well-ventilated area. Store away from food and drink.
OTHER PRECAUTIONS; Never attempt to disassemble, machine, or otherwise modify batteries or injury may result.
SECTION 7- HANDLING AND STORAGE
The batteries should not be opened, destroyed or incinerate, since they may leak or rupture and release to the environment the ingredients that they normally contained in the hermetically sealed container.
HANDLING Do not short circuit terminals, or expose to temperatures above the temperature rating of the battery, over charge the battery, forced over-discharge
(voltage below 0.0V), throw to fire.
Do not crush or puncture the battery, or immerse in liquids.
STORAGE Storage preferably in cool (below 30ºC), dry and ventilated area, which is subject to little temperature change.
Do not place the battery near heating equipment, nor expose to direct sunlight for long periods. Elevated temperatures can result in shortened battery life and degrade performance.
Keep batteries in original packaging until use and do not jumble them.
Do not store batteries in high humidity environment for long periods.
OTHER the cells and the batteries are not rechargeable batteries and should not be charged.
Applying pressure and deforming the battery may lead to disassembly followed by eye skin and throat irritation.
Follow manufacturers recommendations regarding maximum recommended current and operating temperature range.
SECTION 8 - EXPOSURE CONTROLS & PERSONAL PROTECTION
RESPIRATORY PROTECTION: None necessary under normal use. In case of abuse and leak of liquid or fumes, use NIOSH approved Acid Gas Filter Mask or Self-
Contained Breathing Apparatus.
VENTILATION: Not necessary under normal use. In case of abuse, use adequate mechanical ventilation (local exhaust) for battery that vent gas or fumes.
PROTECTIVE GLOVES: None under normal use. In case of spill use PVC or Nitrile gloves of 15 mils (0.015 inch) or thicker.
MSDS SOCl2 G rev GB.doc
3/6 Revised- 22/9/2004
B
Q u a l i t y F i r s t
EYE PROTECTION: Use ANSI approved chemical worker safety goggles or face shield.
OTHER PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT: Chemical resistance clothing is recommended along with eye wash station and safety shower should be available meeting ANSI design criteria.
WORK HYGIENIC PRACTICES: Use good chemical hygiene practice. Wash hands after use and before drinking, eating or smoking. Launder contaminated cloth before reuse.
SUPPLEMENTARY SAFETY AND HEALTH DATA: If the battery is broken or leaked the main hazard is the electrolyte. The electrolyte is mainly solution of Lithium chloride (LiCl), and aluminum chloride (AlCl
3
) in Thionyl chloride (SOCl
2
).
Fires may be fought but only from safe fire fighting distance, evacuate all persons from immediate area of fire.
Prevent heating of the battery, charging the battery, discharge to predetermined limit, do not crush, disassemble, incinerate or short circuit.
SECTION 9- PHYSICAL DATA
BOILING POINT (760 mm Hg)
VAPOR PRESSURE (mm Hg, 25ºC)
VAPOR DENSITY (air=1)
NA, unless individual components exposed
NA, unless individual components exposed
NA, unless individual components exposed
DENSITY (gr/cc)
VOLATILE BY VOLUME (%)
> 1 gr/cc
NA
EVAPORATION RATE (butyl acetate=1) NA, unless individual components exposed
PHYSICAL STATE Solid
SOLUBILITY IN WATER (% by weight) NA, unless individual components exposed
PH
APPEARANCE
ODOR
NA, unless individual components exposed
Geometric Solid Object
If leaking, gives off pungent corrosive odor
SECTION 10- STABILITY AND REACTIVITY
STABLE OR NOT STABLE Stable
INCOMPATIBILITY (MATERIAL TO AVOID) Strong mineral acids, water and alkali solutions.
HAZARDOUS
DECOMPOSITION
PRODUCTS
1. Reaction of lithium with water: Hydrogen (H
2 hydroxide (LiOH).
), Lithium
2. Thermal decomposition over 150ºC: Sulfur oxides, (SO
2
SO
3
), Sulfur chorides (SCl
2
, S
2
Cl
2
), Chlorine (Cl
2 oxide (Li
2
O).
,
), Lithium
3. Electrolyte with water: Hydrogen Chloride (HCl) and SO
2
DECOMPOSITION TEMPERATURE (ºF)
NA
HAZARDOUS POLYMERIZATION: May Occur____ Will Not Occur __X__
CONDITIONS TO AVOID Avoid mechanical abuse, and electrical abuse such as short-circuiting, overcharge, over-discharge,
(voltage reversal) and heating.
MSDS SOCl2 G rev GB.doc
4/6 Revised- 22/9/2004
B
SECTION 11- TOXICOLOGICAL INFORMATION
Q u a l i t y F i r s t
THRESHOLD LIMIT VALUE (TLV) AND SOURCE: NA
HEALTH HAZARD ACUTE AND CHRONIC: Inhalation, skin contact, eye contact and ingestion are not likely by exposure to sealed battery.
Inhalation, skin contact and eye contact are possible when the battery is opened.
Exposure to internal contents, the corrosive fumes will be very irritating to skin, eyes and mucous membranes. Overexposure can cause symptoms of non-fibrotic lung injury and membrane irritation.
Carcinogenicity- NTP: No
Carcinogenicity- IARC: No
Carcinogenicity- OSHA: No
Explanation of Carcinogenicity- No ingredient of a concentration of 0.1% or greater is listed as a carcinogen or suspected carcinogen.
SIGNS AND SYMPTOMS OF OVEREXPOSURE: Exposure to leaking electrolyte from ruptured or leaking battery can cause:
Inhalation - Burns and irritation of the respiratory system, coughing, wheezing, and shortness of breath.
Eyes - Redness, tearing, burns. The electrolyte is corrosive to all ocular tissues.
Skin - The electrolyte is corrosive and causes skin irritation and burns.
Ingestion - The electrolyte solution causes tissue damage to throat and gastro/ respiratory track.
MEDICAL CONDITION AGGRAVATED BY EXPOSURE: Preexisting skin, asthma and respiratory diseases are generally aggravated by exposure to liquid electrolyte vapors or liquid. For further information refer to section 4.
SECTION 12- ECOLOGICAL INFORMATION
1. When properly used and disposed the battery does not present environmental hazard.
2. The battery does not contain mercury, cadmium, or lead.
3. Do not let internal components enter marine environment. Avoid release to waterways, wastewater or ground water.
SECTION 13- DISPOSAL CONSIDERATIONS
1. Disposal must be in accordance with the applicable regulations in every country and state.
2. Disposal of the Lithium batteries should be performed by permitted, professional disposal firms knowledgeable in Federal, State or Local requirements of hazardous waste treatment and hazardous waste transportation.
3. Incineration should never be performed by battery users, but eventually by trained professional in authorized facility with proper gas and fume treatment.
4. Recycling of battery can be done in authorized facility, through licensed waste carrier.
MSDS SOCl2 G rev GB.doc
5/6 Revised- 22/9/2004
B
SECTION 14- TRANSPORTATION /SHIPPING
Q u a l i t y F i r s t
Lithium batteries UN number 3090, class 9 (miscellaneous)
Lithium batteries contained in equipment, UN number 3091, class 9 (miscellaneous).
Packing instructions for 3090- ICAO 903 for air transport
IMDG 903 for sea transport
ADR/RID 903 and 903a for road /rail transport
Packing instructions for 3091- ICAO 912/918 for air transport
IMDG 903 for sea transport
ADR/RID 903 and 903a for road /rail transport
In the USA transportation is according to Code of Federal Regulations (CFR 49
Chapter 1, paragraph 173.185)
A list of Tadiran batteries and cells that are subject to transport regulations and those that are exempted can be obtained from Tadiran Batteries Ltd.
Identification and labeling in compliance with the product drawing should include the battery title, nominal voltage, lot number and warning.
SECTION 15- REGULATORY INFORMATION
1. The transport of the lithium batteries is regulated by the United Nations, “Model
Regulations on Transport of Dangerous Goods”, 13 revised edition-2003 (special provisions 188, 230, and 310).
2. Within the US the lithium batteries and cells are subject to shipping requirements under 49 CFRCh. 1, paragraph 173.185, “lithium batteries”.
3. Shipping of lithium batteries in aircrafts are regulated by the International Civil
Aviation Organization (ICAO) and the International Air Transport Association
(IATA) 2003 requirements in Special Provisions A45, A88 and A99.
4. Shipping of lithium batteries on sea are regulated the International Maritime
Dangerous Goods (IMDG) 2002 requirements in special provisions 188, 230 and 310.
5. Shipping of lithium batteries on Road and Rail, 2002 requirements in special provisions 188, 230 and 310.
6. The internal component (thionyl chloride) is hazardous under the criteria of the
Federal OHSA Hazard Communication Standard 29 CFR 1920.1200.
SECTION 16- OTHER INFORMATION/DISCLAIMER
The information and the recommendations set forth are made in good faith and believed to be accurate at the date of preparation. The present file refers to normal use of the product in question. Tadiran Batteries makes no warranty expressed or implied.
MSDS SOCl2 G rev GB.doc
6/6 Revised- 22/9/2004
BLANK PAGE
TeleRTU Model 3530-15B
Customer Instruction Manual
CI-3530-15B
May, 2006
Emerson Process Management
Bristol, Inc.
1100 Buckingham Street
Watertown, CT 06795
Phone: +1 (860) 945-2262
Fax: +1 (860) 945-2525 www.EmersonProcess.com/Bristol
Emerson Electric Canada, Ltd.
Bristol Canada
6338 Viscount Rd.
Mississauga, Ont. L4V 1H3
Canada
Phone: 905-362-0880
Fax: 905-362-0882 www.EmersonProcess.com/Bristol
Emerson Process Management
BBI, S.A. de C.V.
Homero No. 1343, 3er Piso
Col. Morales Polanco
11540 Mexico, D.F.
Mexico
Phone: (52-55)-52-81-81-12
Fax: (52-55)-52-81-81-09 www.EmersonProcess.com/Bristol
Emerson Process Management
Bristol Babcock, Ltd.
Blackpole Road
Worcester, WR3 8YB
United Kingdom
Phone: +44 1905 856950
Fax: +44 1905 856969 www.EmersonProcess.com/Bristol
Emerson Process Management
Bristol, Inc.
22 Portofino Crescent,
Grand Canals Bunbury, Western Australia 6230
Mail to: PO Box 1987 (zip 6231)
Phone: +61 (8) 9725-2355
Fax: +61 (8) 8 9725-2955 www.EmersonProcess.com/Bristol
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made to supply complete and accurate information. However, Bristol, Inc. assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this document.
If you have comments or questions regarding this manual, please direct them to your local Bristol sales representative, or direct them to one of the addresses listed at left.
Bristol, Inc. does not guarantee the accuracy, sufficiency or suitability of the software delivered herewith. The Customer shall inspect and test such software and other materials to his/her satisfaction before using them with important data.
There are no warranties, expressed or implied, including those of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, concerning the software and other materials delivered herewith.
TeleFlow
™
is a trademark of Bristol, Inc. The Emerson logo is a trade mark and service mark of Emerson Electric Co. Other trademarks or copyrighted products mentioned in this document are for information only, and belong to their respective companies, or trademark holders.
Copyright (c) 2006, Bristol, Inc., 1100 Buckingham St., Watertown, CT 06795. No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form without the express written permission of
Bristol Inc.
Stáhnout
Reklama